<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mic</id>
	<title>Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mic"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/Special:Contributions/Mic"/>
	<updated>2026-06-11T15:25:57Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Creating_a_Plugin_for_Joomla&amp;diff=15971</id>
		<title>J1.5:Creating a Plugin for Joomla</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Creating_a_Plugin_for_Joomla&amp;diff=15971"/>
		<updated>2009-10-18T13:26:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Creating the installation file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====== Creating a Plugin for Joomla! 1.5 ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== How to create your own plugin =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This How-To should provide you with the basics of what you need to know to develop your own plugin. Most plugins consist of just a single code file but to correctly install the plugin code it must be packaged into an installation file which can be processed by the Joomla! installer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating the installation file ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with all add-ons in Joomla!, plugins are easily installed as a .zip file (.tar.gz is also supported) but a correctly formatted XML file must be included. As an example, here is the XML installation file for the categories searchbot plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;iso-8859-1&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;install version=&amp;quot;1.5&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;plugin&amp;quot; group=&amp;quot;search&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;Categories searchbot&amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;author&amp;gt;Joomla! Project&amp;lt;/author&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;creationDate&amp;gt;November 2005&amp;lt;/creationDate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;copyright&amp;gt;(C) 2005 Open Source Matters. All rights reserved.&amp;lt;/copyright&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;license&amp;gt;GNU/GPL&amp;lt;/license&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;authorEmail&amp;gt;admin@joomla.org&amp;lt;/authorEmail&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;authorUrl&amp;gt;www.joomla.org&amp;lt;/authorUrl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;version&amp;gt;1.1&amp;lt;/version&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;description&amp;gt;Allows searching of Categories information&amp;lt;/description&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;filename plugin=&amp;quot;categories.searchbot&amp;quot;&amp;gt;categories.searchbot.php&amp;lt;/filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/files&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;params&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;search_limit&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; size=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;50&amp;quot; label=&amp;quot;Search Limit&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;Number of search items to return&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;        &lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/params&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/install&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see, the system is similar to other Joomla! XML installation files. You only have to look out for the group=&amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; entry in the&amp;lt;install&amp;gt;tag and the extended information in the&amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;tag. This information tells Joomla! into which folder to copy the file and to which group the plugin should be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are creating a plugin that responds to existing core events, the group=&amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; tag would be changed to reflect the name of existing plugin folder for the event type you wish to augment. e.g. group=&amp;quot;authentication&amp;quot; or group=&amp;quot;user&amp;quot;. See Tutorial:Creating Plugins for a complete list of existing core event categories. In creating a new plugin to respond to core events it is important that your plugin&#039;s name is unique and does not conflict with any of the other plugins that may also be responding to the core event you wish to service as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are creating a plugin to respond to non-core system events your choice for the group=&amp;quot;xxx&amp;quot; tag should be different than any of the existing core categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip&#039;&#039;&#039;: if you add the parameter &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;method=&amp;quot;upgrade&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to the tag &#039;&#039;&#039;install&#039;&#039;&#039;, this plugin can be installed without deinstalling it before.&lt;br /&gt;
All existing files will be overridden, but old files will not be deleted!&lt;br /&gt;
So handle with care.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating the Plugin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Joomla! 1.5 introduces a new, more object-orientated, way of writing plugins. The old method is still supported for backwards-compatibility (see next section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;?php&lt;br /&gt;
// no direct access&lt;br /&gt;
defined( &#039;_JEXEC&#039; ) or die( &#039;Restricted access&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// Import library dependencies&lt;br /&gt;
jimport(&#039;joomla.event.plugin&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
class plg&amp;lt;PluginGroup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;PluginName&amp;gt; extends JPlugin&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
   /**&lt;br /&gt;
    * Constructor&lt;br /&gt;
    *&lt;br /&gt;
    * For php4 compatability we must not use the __constructor as a constructor for&lt;br /&gt;
    * plugins because func_get_args ( void ) returns a copy of all passed arguments&lt;br /&gt;
    * NOT references.  This causes problems with cross-referencing necessary for the&lt;br /&gt;
    * observer design pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
    */&lt;br /&gt;
    function plg&amp;lt;PluginGroup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;PluginName&amp;gt;( &amp;amp;$subject )&lt;br /&gt;
    {&lt;br /&gt;
            parent::__construct( $subject );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
            // load plugin parameters&lt;br /&gt;
            $this-&amp;gt;_plugin = &amp;gt; JPluginHelper::getPlugin( &#039;&amp;lt;GroupName&amp;gt;&#039;, &#039;&amp;lt;PluginName&amp;gt;&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
            $this-&amp;gt;_params = new JParameter( $this-&amp;gt;_plugin-&amp;gt;params );&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    /**&lt;br /&gt;
    * Plugin method with the same name as the event will be called automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
    */&lt;br /&gt;
    function &amp;lt;EventName&amp;gt;()&lt;br /&gt;
    {&lt;br /&gt;
        global $mainframe;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
        // Plugin code goes here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
        return true;&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
?&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating the Plugin (Legacy Mode) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section describes the legacy method of creating plugins used prior to Joomla! 1.5. Some core Joomla! plugins may still use this method but will be gradually re-written over time. This method is still supported for backwards-compatibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code that you want executed when the event triggers is written as a PHP function. Prior to the function definition you make a call to the registerEvent() method so that the Joomla! event system associates your function with the appropriate event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, take a look at this skeleton code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;?php&lt;br /&gt;
// no direct access&lt;br /&gt;
defined( &#039;_JEXEC&#039; ) or die( &#039;Restricted access&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$mainframe-&amp;gt;registerEvent( &#039;&amp;lt;EventName&amp;gt;&#039;, &#039;&amp;lt;FunctionName&amp;gt;&#039; );&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
function &amp;lt;FunctionName&amp;gt;( &amp;lt;ParameterList&amp;gt; ) {&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    //Plugin code goes here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
?&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the function $mainframe→registerEvent() your plugin is registered into the Joomla! event system. This means that when the event called &#039;&amp;lt;EventName&amp;gt;&#039; is later triggered, the function called &#039;&amp;lt;FunctionName&amp;gt;&#039; will be called.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can write your plugin function code anyway you want. If you want to use parameters, it&#039;s no problem, just use them as usual. You can register as many events and plugin functions together in one file as you want. When you&#039;re done, your plugin is ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using Plugins in Your Code ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you&#039;ve created your plugin, you will probably want to call it in your code. You might not; the Joomla! core has a number of built-in events that you might want your plugin code to be registered to. In which case you don&#039;t need to do the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to trigger an event then you use code like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;$results = $mainframe-&amp;gt;triggerEvent( &#039;&amp;lt;EventName&amp;gt;&#039;, &amp;lt;ParameterArray&amp;gt; );&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or in Joomla 1.5 fashion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;php&amp;quot;&amp;gt;$dispatcher =&amp;amp; JDispatcher::getInstance(); $results = $dispatcher-&amp;gt;trigger( &#039;&amp;lt;EventName&amp;gt;&#039;, &amp;lt;ParameterArray&amp;gt; );&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to note that the parameters have to be in an array. The plugin function itself will get the parameters as single values. The return value will consist of an array of return values from the different plugins (so it can also contain multilevel arrays).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are creating a plugin for a new, non-core event, it is also important to remember to activate your plugin after you installed it, and of course to precede any reference to your new plugin with the JPluginHelper::importPlugin() command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Conclusion =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plugin structure for Joomla! 1.5 is very flexible and powerful. Not only can plugins be used to handle events triggered by the core application and extensions, but plugins can also be used to make third party extensions extensible and powerful.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Creating_a_CSS_Drop_down_Menu&amp;diff=14872</id>
		<title>J1.5:Creating a CSS Drop down Menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Creating_a_CSS_Drop_down_Menu&amp;diff=14872"/>
		<updated>2009-07-04T08:55:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Suckerfish combined with the default Joomla! menu module */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;To emphasize W3C valid code and lean pages, neither flash and JavaScript are generally considered to be favourable. But a lot of (drop down) menu solution make use of one of these two. There are a number of techniques one can use to get this more visually attractive (drop down) menus, almost solely using CSS and limiting the use of javascript to a minimum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of them use unordered lists (better known as bulleted lists), to create the menu. An often used solution is the drop down menu called “suckerfish”. Its pure CSS, very lean, hack free and just as 12 lines of JavaScript to bail out some tiny problems with IE6 and lower. You can see a [http://www.htmldog.com/articles/suckerfish/dropdowns/example/ demo] of what can be created with Suckerfish. More detailed guides about the Suckerfish technique, can be found at [http://www.htmldog.com/articles/suckerfish/dropdowns/|htmldog.com] and [http://www.alistapart.com/articles/dropdowns/ alistapart.com]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suckerfish functions very well in combination with Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
__toc__&lt;br /&gt;
==Suckerfish combined with the extended menu module==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to let Suckerfish function well, you need your menu outputted as a good clean list. Well it just so happens that there is a module out there to do this. Its called extended_menu, you can find it [http://de.siteof.de/extended-menu.html here] and in the [http://extensions.joomla.org JED].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, grab the module and install. Now let’s set it up. It’s easiest if you give it a menu and module class suffix. I used “mainnav” (you’ll see in the CSS below). A couple of other settings you will need:&lt;br /&gt;
- Menu style: Tree List&lt;br /&gt;
- Expand Menu: Yes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So put the menu where you want it, then to the CSS. This is a little tricky, it took me some trial and error to get the effects I wanted, but you can just skip that part and use mine. :)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the following, you can either edit the exisitng template_css.css or create a new css file, name it and include in inside the &amp;lt;head&amp;gt;..&amp;lt;/head&amp;gt; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#twocols{ /*the columns that gets dropped down over yours might be different*/&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:20;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#leftcol{  /*the columns that gets dropped down over yours might be different*/&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:10;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.moduletablemainnav { /* I have absolutely positioned the module, you might have a different scheme*/&lt;br /&gt;
  position:absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
  top:187px;&lt;br /&gt;
  left:20px;&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:100;&lt;br /&gt;
  font:0.9em Verdana, Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin:0;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav,#mainlevelmainnav ul {&lt;br /&gt;
  float:left;&lt;br /&gt;
  list-style:none;&lt;br /&gt;
  line-height:1em;&lt;br /&gt;
  background:transparent;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight:700;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin:0;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav a {&lt;br /&gt;
  display:block;&lt;br /&gt;
  color:#f90;&lt;br /&gt;
  text-decoration:none;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin-right:15px;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0.3em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li {&lt;br /&gt;
  float:left;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li ul  {&lt;br /&gt;
  position:absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
  left:-999em;&lt;br /&gt;
  height:auto;&lt;br /&gt;
  width:11em;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight:400;&lt;br /&gt;
  background:#36f;&lt;br /&gt;
  border:#00C 1px solid;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li li {&lt;br /&gt;
  width:11em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li ul a {&lt;br /&gt;
  width:11em;&lt;br /&gt;
  color:#fff;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-size:0.9em;&lt;br /&gt;
  line-height:1em;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight:400;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li:hover ul ul,#mainlevelmainnav li:hover ul ul ul,#mainlevelmainnav li.sfhover ul ul,#mainlevelmainnav li.sfhover ul ul ul{&lt;br /&gt;
  left:-999em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li:hover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li li:hover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li li li:hover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li.sfhover&lt;br /&gt;
  l,#mainlevelmainnav li li.sfhover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li li li.sfhover ul {&lt;br /&gt;
  left:auto;&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:6000;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li li:hover,#mainlevelmainnav li li.sfhover {&lt;br /&gt;
  background:#039 url(../images/soccerball.gif) 98% 50% no-repeat;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, just make sure you have the z-indexes set up properly, also remember to have a z-index, the element needs some sort of positioning, if not absolute then relative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Last but not least you need to add the JavaScript for IE into the head of the template index.php (or a js file), it doesn’t like the :hover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;javascript&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script type=&amp;quot;text/javascript&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--//--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[//&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
  sfHover = function() {&lt;br /&gt;
     var sfEls = document.getElementById(&amp;quot;mainlevelmainnav&amp;quot;).getElementsByTagName(&amp;quot;LI&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
     for (var i=0; i&amp;lt;sfEls.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
        sfEls[i].onmouseover=function() {&lt;br /&gt;
           this.className+=&amp;quot; sfhover&amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
        sfEls[i].onmouseout=function() {&lt;br /&gt;
           this.className=this.className.replace(new RegExp(&amp;quot; sfhover\\b&amp;quot;), &amp;quot;&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
  if (window.attachEvent) window.attachEvent(&amp;quot;onload&amp;quot;, sfHover);&lt;br /&gt;
//--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hopefully, follow this and Bob’s your Uncle you should have clean valid drop downs for your menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Suckerfish combined with the default Joomla! menu module==&lt;br /&gt;
The second approach is to implement Drop Down menu using the mod_mainmenu module that comes with Joomal 1.5. I&#039;ve played around with the “suckerfish” and CSS to make this work. This work perfectly in IE 7 as well as Netscape.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create your Menu with the following Hierarchy:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure the parameters are set to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Menu Style is set to List.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Always show sub-menu Items is set to Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Menu Class Suffix is set to &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;san&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; - you can pick you own, but then make sure you change it in CSS &amp;amp; JS files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  Insert this piece of JS in your template index.php &amp;lt;head&amp;gt;  tag, or in java script file that’s called from index.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;javascript&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/* ********* drop down menu Java script code - start **********/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script type=”text/javascript”&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!–//–&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[//&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!– // don’t need this line if using .JS file&lt;br /&gt;
sfHover = function()&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
 var sfEls = document.menusan.getElementsByTagName(”LI”);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 for (var j=0; j&amp;lt;sfEls.length; j++)&lt;br /&gt;
 {&lt;br /&gt;
  sfEls[j].onmouseover=function()&lt;br /&gt;
  {&lt;br /&gt;
   this.className+=” sfhover”;&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
  sfEls[j].onmouseout=function()&lt;br /&gt;
  {&lt;br /&gt;
   this.className=this.className.replace(new RegExp(” sfhover\\b”), “”);&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
 } &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
if (window.attachEvent) window.attachEvent(”onload”, sfHover);&lt;br /&gt;
//–&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt; // don’t need this line if using .JS file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* ********* drop down menu Java script code – end  **********/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Here the corresponding CSS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here again, either the exisiting template_css.css (of your template) or create a new css file, name it and include it between the &amp;lt;head&amp;gt;...&amp;lt;/head&amp;gt; section of the index.php.&lt;br /&gt;
Third option can be that you add &amp;lt;script type=text/css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;.... here following css code ....&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt; and put this into the head section of your index.php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Never put script code parts (css, java,etc.) directly into the code section of your files. You will loose your XHTML-validy!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/****************** Dropdown Menu styling starts here **************/&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
 /* use these params to positions your menu */&lt;br /&gt;
 position: relative;&lt;br /&gt;
 left: 10px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan, .menusan li, .menusan li ul { /* all lists */&lt;br /&gt;
 padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 list-style: none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li a {&lt;br /&gt;
 display: block;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: 10em;&lt;br /&gt;
 color:#FFFFFF ;&lt;br /&gt;
 background-color:#BC031F;&lt;br /&gt;
 border:2px solid #BC031F;&lt;br /&gt;
 text-decoration:none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li { /* all list items */&lt;br /&gt;
 float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: 10em; /* width needed or else Opera goes nuts */&lt;br /&gt;
 border-bottom:1px solid #ccc;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li ul { /* second-level lists */&lt;br /&gt;
 position: absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: 10em;&lt;br /&gt;
 left: -98%; /* using left instead of display to hide menus because display: none isn’t read by screen readers */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li a:hover {&lt;br /&gt;
 border:2px solid #8C7AD6;&lt;br /&gt;
 background-color:#8C7AD6;&lt;br /&gt;
 color:#fff;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li:hover ul, .menusan li.sfhover ul  { /* lists nested under hovered list items */&lt;br /&gt;
 left: auto; /* change is to 10px, 20px, etc for indenting the sub menue */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* **************** Dropdown Menu styling end here ***************/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Save all and you should be good to go&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Trick&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a single menu to create multiple drop downs menus. Here’s how to do it. Just create the menu in the following hierarchy and you’ll have 2 drop down menus , Menu 1 &amp;amp; Menu 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 2 Sub Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 2 Sub Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 2 Sub Menu 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You might have to play with CSS a bit to work out the positions of the second menu etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tips and tricks]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tips and tricks 1.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tips and tricks 1.5]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Creating_a_CSS_Drop_down_Menu&amp;diff=14871</id>
		<title>J1.5:Creating a CSS Drop down Menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Creating_a_CSS_Drop_down_Menu&amp;diff=14871"/>
		<updated>2009-07-04T08:49:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Suckerfish combined with the extended menu module */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;To emphasize W3C valid code and lean pages, neither flash and JavaScript are generally considered to be favourable. But a lot of (drop down) menu solution make use of one of these two. There are a number of techniques one can use to get this more visually attractive (drop down) menus, almost solely using CSS and limiting the use of javascript to a minimum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of them use unordered lists (better known as bulleted lists), to create the menu. An often used solution is the drop down menu called “suckerfish”. Its pure CSS, very lean, hack free and just as 12 lines of JavaScript to bail out some tiny problems with IE6 and lower. You can see a [http://www.htmldog.com/articles/suckerfish/dropdowns/example/ demo] of what can be created with Suckerfish. More detailed guides about the Suckerfish technique, can be found at [http://www.htmldog.com/articles/suckerfish/dropdowns/|htmldog.com] and [http://www.alistapart.com/articles/dropdowns/ alistapart.com]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suckerfish functions very well in combination with Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
__toc__&lt;br /&gt;
==Suckerfish combined with the extended menu module==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to let Suckerfish function well, you need your menu outputted as a good clean list. Well it just so happens that there is a module out there to do this. Its called extended_menu, you can find it [http://de.siteof.de/extended-menu.html here] and in the [http://extensions.joomla.org JED].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, grab the module and install. Now let’s set it up. It’s easiest if you give it a menu and module class suffix. I used “mainnav” (you’ll see in the CSS below). A couple of other settings you will need:&lt;br /&gt;
- Menu style: Tree List&lt;br /&gt;
- Expand Menu: Yes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So put the menu where you want it, then to the CSS. This is a little tricky, it took me some trial and error to get the effects I wanted, but you can just skip that part and use mine. :)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the following, you can either edit the exisitng template_css.css or create a new css file, name it and include in inside the &amp;lt;head&amp;gt;..&amp;lt;/head&amp;gt; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#twocols{ /*the columns that gets dropped down over yours might be different*/&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:20;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#leftcol{  /*the columns that gets dropped down over yours might be different*/&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:10;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.moduletablemainnav { /* I have absolutely positioned the module, you might have a different scheme*/&lt;br /&gt;
  position:absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
  top:187px;&lt;br /&gt;
  left:20px;&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:100;&lt;br /&gt;
  font:0.9em Verdana, Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin:0;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav,#mainlevelmainnav ul {&lt;br /&gt;
  float:left;&lt;br /&gt;
  list-style:none;&lt;br /&gt;
  line-height:1em;&lt;br /&gt;
  background:transparent;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight:700;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin:0;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav a {&lt;br /&gt;
  display:block;&lt;br /&gt;
  color:#f90;&lt;br /&gt;
  text-decoration:none;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin-right:15px;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0.3em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li {&lt;br /&gt;
  float:left;&lt;br /&gt;
  padding:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li ul  {&lt;br /&gt;
  position:absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
  left:-999em;&lt;br /&gt;
  height:auto;&lt;br /&gt;
  width:11em;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight:400;&lt;br /&gt;
  background:#36f;&lt;br /&gt;
  border:#00C 1px solid;&lt;br /&gt;
  margin:0;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li li {&lt;br /&gt;
  width:11em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li ul a {&lt;br /&gt;
  width:11em;&lt;br /&gt;
  color:#fff;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-size:0.9em;&lt;br /&gt;
  line-height:1em;&lt;br /&gt;
  font-weight:400;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li:hover ul ul,#mainlevelmainnav li:hover ul ul ul,#mainlevelmainnav li.sfhover ul ul,#mainlevelmainnav li.sfhover ul ul ul{&lt;br /&gt;
  left:-999em;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li:hover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li li:hover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li li li:hover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li.sfhover&lt;br /&gt;
  l,#mainlevelmainnav li li.sfhover ul,#mainlevelmainnav li li li.sfhover ul {&lt;br /&gt;
  left:auto;&lt;br /&gt;
  z-index:6000;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#mainlevelmainnav li li:hover,#mainlevelmainnav li li.sfhover {&lt;br /&gt;
  background:#039 url(../images/soccerball.gif) 98% 50% no-repeat;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, just make sure you have the z-indexes set up properly, also remember to have a z-index, the element needs some sort of positioning, if not absolute then relative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Last but not least you need to add the JavaScript for IE into the head of the template index.php (or a js file), it doesn’t like the :hover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;javascript&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script type=&amp;quot;text/javascript&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--//--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[//&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
  sfHover = function() {&lt;br /&gt;
     var sfEls = document.getElementById(&amp;quot;mainlevelmainnav&amp;quot;).getElementsByTagName(&amp;quot;LI&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
     for (var i=0; i&amp;lt;sfEls.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
        sfEls[i].onmouseover=function() {&lt;br /&gt;
           this.className+=&amp;quot; sfhover&amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
        sfEls[i].onmouseout=function() {&lt;br /&gt;
           this.className=this.className.replace(new RegExp(&amp;quot; sfhover\\b&amp;quot;), &amp;quot;&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
        }&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
  if (window.attachEvent) window.attachEvent(&amp;quot;onload&amp;quot;, sfHover);&lt;br /&gt;
//--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hopefully, follow this and Bob’s your Uncle you should have clean valid drop downs for your menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Suckerfish combined with the default Joomla! menu module==&lt;br /&gt;
The second approach is to implement Drop Down menu using the mod_mainmenu module that comes with Joomal 1.5. I&#039;ve played around with the “suckerfish” and CSS to make this work. This work perfectly in IE 7 as well as Netscape.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create your Menu with the following Hierarchy:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure the parameters are set to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Menu Style is set to List.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Always show sub-menu Items is set to Yes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Menu Class Suffix is set to &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;san&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; - you can pick you own, but then make sure you change it in CSS &amp;amp; JS files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  Insert this piece of JS in your template index.php &amp;lt;head&amp;gt;  tag, or in java script file that’s called from index.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;javascript&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/* ********* drop down menu Java script code - start **********/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;script type=”text/javascript”&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!–//–&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[//&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!– // don’t need this line if using .JS file&lt;br /&gt;
sfHover = function()&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
 var sfEls = document.menusan.getElementsByTagName(”LI”);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 for (var j=0; j&amp;lt;sfEls.length; j++)&lt;br /&gt;
 {&lt;br /&gt;
  sfEls[j].onmouseover=function()&lt;br /&gt;
  {&lt;br /&gt;
   this.className+=” sfhover”;&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
  sfEls[j].onmouseout=function()&lt;br /&gt;
  {&lt;br /&gt;
   this.className=this.className.replace(new RegExp(” sfhover\\b”), “”);&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
 } &lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
if (window.attachEvent) window.attachEvent(”onload”, sfHover);&lt;br /&gt;
//–&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/script&amp;gt; // don’t need this line if using .JS file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* ********* drop down menu Java script code – end  **********/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Here the corresponding CSS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;css&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/****************** Dropdown Menu styling starts here **************/&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan&lt;br /&gt;
{&lt;br /&gt;
 /* use these params to positions your menu */&lt;br /&gt;
 position: relative;&lt;br /&gt;
 left: 10px;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan, .menusan li, .menusan li ul { /* all lists */&lt;br /&gt;
 padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 margin: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 list-style: none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li a {&lt;br /&gt;
 display: block;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: 10em;&lt;br /&gt;
 color:#FFFFFF ;&lt;br /&gt;
 background-color:#BC031F;&lt;br /&gt;
 border:2px solid #BC031F;&lt;br /&gt;
 text-decoration:none;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li { /* all list items */&lt;br /&gt;
 float: left;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: 10em; /* width needed or else Opera goes nuts */&lt;br /&gt;
 border-bottom:1px solid #ccc;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li ul { /* second-level lists */&lt;br /&gt;
 position: absolute;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: 10em;&lt;br /&gt;
 left: -98%; /* using left instead of display to hide menus because display: none isn’t read by screen readers */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li a:hover {&lt;br /&gt;
 border:2px solid #8C7AD6;&lt;br /&gt;
 background-color:#8C7AD6;&lt;br /&gt;
 color:#fff;&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.menusan li:hover ul, .menusan li.sfhover ul  { /* lists nested under hovered list items */&lt;br /&gt;
 left: auto; /* change is to 10px, 20px, etc for indenting the sub menue */&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
/* **************** Dropdown Menu styling end here ***************/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Save all and you should be good to go&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Trick&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a single menu to create multiple drop downs menus. Here’s how to do it. Just create the menu in the following hierarchy and you’ll have 2 drop down menus , Menu 1 &amp;amp; Menu 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 1 Sub Menu 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 2 Sub Menu 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 2 Sub Menu 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
– Menu 2 Sub Menu 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You might have to play with CSS a bit to work out the positions of the second menu etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tips and tricks]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tips and tricks 1.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tips and tricks 1.5]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Language_Guidelines_for_3rd_Party_Extensions&amp;diff=13387</id>
		<title>J1.5:Language Guidelines for 3rd Party Extensions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=J1.5:Language_Guidelines_for_3rd_Party_Extensions&amp;diff=13387"/>
		<updated>2009-03-06T14:03:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The purpose of this document is to give some guidelines for developers for their 3rd party Joomla! 1.5 extension, so that users can easier adapt extensions for use in their local language. &#039;&#039;&#039;These guidelines are not rules&#039;&#039;&#039; which would limit their freedom in development and distribution. But extensions based on these guidelines will be more flexible and easier to translate, which might have a positive influence on their use and popularity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Do NOT use hard coded language text ==&lt;br /&gt;
A module (e.g. mod_somemodule) with the following hard coded Dutch language text in the XML installation (and configuration) file, &lt;br /&gt;
needs to be fully analyzed and rewritten for any other language.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;dateformat&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;%A %d %B %Y, %H:%M&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 label=&amp;quot;Datum / Tijd formaat&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;Gebruik de PHP strftime datum en tijd opmaak.&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;posttext&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 label=&amp;quot;Tekst achter datum&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;Eventuele tekst die achter de datum wordt getoond.&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use language labels instead ==&lt;br /&gt;
The same mod_somemodule.xml installer file but now with language labels is much easier to translate!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;dateformat&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;%A %d %B %Y, %H:%M&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 label=&amp;quot;DATUMTIJDFORMAAT&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;DATUMTIJDFORMAATBESCHR&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;posttext&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 label=&amp;quot;TEKSTACHTER&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;TEKSTACHTERBESCHR&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the &#039;&#039;&#039;nl-NL.mod_somemodule.ini&#039;&#039;&#039; language file needs to be translated to get the module working in any other language:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;ini&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
DATUMTIJDFORMAAT = Datum / Tijd formaat&lt;br /&gt;
DATUMTIJDFORMAATBESCHR = Gebruik de PHP strftime datum en tijd opmaak.&lt;br /&gt;
TEKSTACHTER = Tekst achter datum&lt;br /&gt;
TEKSTACHTERBESCHR = Eventuele tekst die achter de datum wordt getoond.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use English language labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
The previous example with language labels and an external language file is easier to translate. However Non-Dutch users will have much difficulties in translating the language file. Please use English language labels instead!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;xml&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;dateformat&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;%A %d %B %Y, %H:%M&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 label=&amp;quot;DATETIMEFORMAT&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;DATETIMEFORMATDESCR&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;param name=&amp;quot;posttext&amp;quot; type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; default=&amp;quot;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 label=&amp;quot;TEXTAFTER&amp;quot; description=&amp;quot;POSTTEXTDESCR&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And the same English labels with Dutch translation in nl-NL.mod_somemodule.ini&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;ini&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
DATETIMEFORMAT = Datum / Tijd formaat&lt;br /&gt;
DATETIMEFORMATDESCR = Gebruik de PHP strftime datum en tijd opmaak.&lt;br /&gt;
TEXTAFTER = Tekst achter datum&lt;br /&gt;
POSTTEXTDESCR = Eventuele tekst die achter de datum wordt getoond.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Include an English language file ==&lt;br /&gt;
Again, the above example is easier to translate because of the English labels. But again, not everyone can read and translate the Dutch translation. Most people can read English, so include at least an English language file. Translating English to some other language is easier for most people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
en-GB.mod_somemodule.ini&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;ini&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
DATETIMEFORMAT = Date/Time format&lt;br /&gt;
DATETIMEFORMATDESCR = Use the PHP strftime formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
TEXTAFTER = Text after date&lt;br /&gt;
POSTTEXTDESCR = Any text that should be placed after the date.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another reason to provide an English language file is to help translators using the Translation Manager Component to create the file in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
The Translation Manager Component proposes the basic en-GB set as a reference when creating/editing these files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PHP strftime ==&lt;br /&gt;
Countries have different date and time formats. Please use the &#039;&#039;&#039;PHP strftime function&#039;&#039;&#039; for dates and times in your extension. That way the local date/time format will be used automatically, because it&#039;s based on the local format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use UTF8 ==&lt;br /&gt;
All .ini language files need to be saved as UTF-8 no BOM for the proper display of characters which are not in the ASCII range [a..z] and [A..Z].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
es-ES.mod_somemodule.ini&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;source lang=&amp;quot;ini&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
DATETIMEFORMAT = Formato de fecha/tiempo&lt;br /&gt;
DATETIMEFORMATDESCR = Usan el PHP strftime formateo.&lt;br /&gt;
TEXTAFTER = Texto despuÃ©s de Fecha&lt;br /&gt;
POSTTEXTDESCR = Cualquier texto que deberÃ­a ser colocado despuÃ©s de la fecha.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/source&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
despuÃ©s is UTF-8 and will be displayed as después.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Group logical entities in translation file ==&lt;br /&gt;
Large translation files are difficult to read. Try to group logical entities together, and use # comment lines (start with &amp;quot;#&amp;quot;) to describe the logical entity. A good example is the Joomla core translation file &#039;&#039;&#039;/language/en-GB/en-GB.ini&#039;&#039;&#039;. Date format, Months, Days of the Week, Time Zones, Mailer Codes are all grouped together and those logical entities start with a comment line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another possibility is the usage of &#039;&#039;&#039;brackets&#039;&#039;&#039; like [here is the group for advanced parameters].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Translation File Version Control ==&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that your extensions might be used in a broad range of different languages. A new release of a new version of your extension might have changes in your default language file. If your extension has a large language files, then individual users might have difficulties to find the changes. Please make their lives easier and find a way to make translation easier. Some 3rd party extension developers put changed language labels on top, or bottom, of the language files which makes the changes easier to spot. Some added # comments (e.g. with version information) are also very welcome.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[Please suggest more workable solutions here]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Collect and distribute translations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Ask your users to send you any missing language translation files, and make those available for download at the same place as your extension. Creating new translations, while others have already done that, is a waste of time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Conclusion ==&lt;br /&gt;
Make your extensions easy to translate with these guidelines. The result of easy translation able extensions is that more users can benefit from your hard work.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
More information regarding the use of language files can be found at the following places:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding multi-language support]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to create a language pack]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating a language definition file]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Location of template language definition files]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Formatted fields in language translation strings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Languages]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12943</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.languages.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12943"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T15:29:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Column Headers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Language Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; click the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; in the control center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Language Manager you can set the default Language for both the Front-end and Back-end of your Joomla! web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Extensions.Languages.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Both the &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Administrator&#039;&#039; tabs have the following column titles. These details are fetched from the XML file included in the language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this radio button to select the Language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The names of the installed Languages on this web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default language of the site, marked with a yellow graphical asterisk in this column. &#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: to every user a language can be assigned (see &amp;quot;User Management&amp;quot;), user from groups &amp;quot;Administrator&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Super Administrator&amp;quot; can select their preferred language themself at login.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the installed language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The creation date of the language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the language translator is displayed in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The e-mail address of the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Language that you want to be the default Language. Then click this button. The default star symbol will show in the Default column, indicating that this is now the default Language.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site and Administrator Links==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the columns, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Template_manager_links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Front-end of the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Back-end of the web site. Note that the languages for the Front and Back end can be different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can use any Language from the list of installed Languages, either by having it assigned in the [[screen.users.15|User Manager]] or by filling out a [[Screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]] at the Front end. This will cause the Joomla! system prompts to be generated in this Language just for this User. For example, if a User chooses Spanish as their language, then the Search Module will show with prompts in Spanish, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Spanish_language_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*This User&#039;s choice is not affected by the Default Language set for the Front-end.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Changing a User&#039;s Language or the Default Language does not affect the web site&#039;s Articles and other content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do not delete the default language files (for example, with FTP). This will create errors on both the Front-end and Back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional Languages can be added using the [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If desired, you can show the Front-end site in one Language and show the Back-end administration pages in a different Language. Also, individual articles can be configured to use a different language in the Advanced Parameter pane when editing the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install more Languages: [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall a Language: [[screen.installer.15#Languages Screen|Extension Manager - Languages screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Language for a User: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a form that allows a User to set their own Language: [[screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To set the Language of an Article: [[screen.content.edit.15#Parameters - Advanced|Article Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Advanced&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Language Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12942</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.languages.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12942"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T15:22:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Screenshot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Language Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; click the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; in the control center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Language Manager you can set the default Language for both the Front-end and Back-end of your Joomla! web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Extensions.Languages.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Both the &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Administrator&#039;&#039; tabs have the following column titles. These details are fetched from the XML file included in the language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this radio button to select the Language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The names of the installed Languages on this web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default language of the site, marked with a yellow graphical asterisk in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the installed language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The creation date of the language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the language translator is displayed in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The e-mail address of the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Language that you want to be the default Language. Then click this button. The default star symbol will show in the Default column, indicating that this is now the default Language.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site and Administrator Links==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the columns, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Template_manager_links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Front-end of the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Back-end of the web site. Note that the languages for the Front and Back end can be different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can use any Language from the list of installed Languages, either by having it assigned in the [[screen.users.15|User Manager]] or by filling out a [[Screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]] at the Front end. This will cause the Joomla! system prompts to be generated in this Language just for this User. For example, if a User chooses Spanish as their language, then the Search Module will show with prompts in Spanish, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Spanish_language_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*This User&#039;s choice is not affected by the Default Language set for the Front-end.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Changing a User&#039;s Language or the Default Language does not affect the web site&#039;s Articles and other content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do not delete the default language files (for example, with FTP). This will create errors on both the Front-end and Back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional Languages can be added using the [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If desired, you can show the Front-end site in one Language and show the Back-end administration pages in a different Language. Also, individual articles can be configured to use a different language in the Advanced Parameter pane when editing the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install more Languages: [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall a Language: [[screen.installer.15#Languages Screen|Extension Manager - Languages screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Language for a User: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a form that allows a User to set their own Language: [[screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To set the Language of an Article: [[screen.content.edit.15#Parameters - Advanced|Article Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Advanced&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Language Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Extensions.Languages.png&amp;diff=12941</id>
		<title>File:Extensions.Languages.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Extensions.Languages.png&amp;diff=12941"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T15:21:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Extensions Language&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Extensions Language&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15&amp;diff=12938</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15&amp;diff=12938"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T07:44:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Description */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Article stub for purge expired cache.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools &amp;amp;rarr; Purge Expired Cache&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the Back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This tool will purge all expired cache files and therefore clean up the the webspace.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: if you have a large amount of items we recommend to purge the files as many times as possible to avoid overloading your webspace!&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: if you have a great amount of cached files and your server settings of &#039;max_input_time&#039; is set to less then 60 (seconds), you mave recieve a php warning message. In this case start this process again!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cache.Manager_PurgeExpiredCache.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TB.PurgeExpired.Help.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purge Expired&#039;&#039;&#039;.Click on this Button will start the purging process.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Purging cached files is recommended if there is a great amount of items.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you recieve an error / a warning during the process, start this tool again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the cache settings for your site: [[screen.config.15#Cache Settings|Global Configuration - Cache Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Cache|Tools}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15&amp;diff=12937</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15&amp;diff=12937"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T07:44:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Quick Tips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Article stub for purge expired cache.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools &amp;amp;rarr; Purge Expired Cache&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the Back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This tool will purge all expired cache files and therefore clean up the the webspace.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: if you have a large amount of items we recommend to purge the files as many times as possible to avoid overloading your webspace!&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: if you have a great amount of cache files and your server settings of &#039;max_input_time&#039; is set to less then 60 (seconds), you mave recieve a php warning message. In this case start this process again!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cache.Manager_PurgeExpiredCache.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TB.PurgeExpired.Help.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purge Expired&#039;&#039;&#039;.Click on this Button will start the purging process.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Purging cached files is recommended if there is a great amount of items.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you recieve an error / a warning during the process, start this tool again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the cache settings for your site: [[screen.config.15#Cache Settings|Global Configuration - Cache Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Cache|Tools}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:TB.PurgeExpired.Help.png&amp;diff=12936</id>
		<title>File:TB.PurgeExpired.Help.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:TB.PurgeExpired.Help.png&amp;diff=12936"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T07:42:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Toolbar&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Cache.Manager_PurgeExpiredCache.png&amp;diff=12935</id>
		<title>File:Cache.Manager PurgeExpiredCache.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Cache.Manager_PurgeExpiredCache.png&amp;diff=12935"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T07:41:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Cache Manager Purge Expired Cache&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cache Manager Purge Expired Cache&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15&amp;diff=12934</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.tools.expired.cache.15&amp;diff=12934"/>
		<updated>2009-01-29T07:39:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Article stub for purge expired cache.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools &amp;amp;rarr; Purge Expired Cache&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the Back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This tool will purge all expired cache files and therefore clean up the the webspace.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: if you have a large amount of items we recommend to purge the files as many times as possible to avoid overloading your webspace!&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: if you have a great amount of cache files and your server settings of &#039;max_input_time&#039; is set to less then 60 (seconds), you mave recieve a php warning message. In this case start this process again!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cache.Manager_PurgeExpiredCache.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:TB.PurgeExpired.Help.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Purge Expired&#039;&#039;&#039;.Click on this Button will start the purging process.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Purging cached files is recommended if there is a great amount it items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the cache settings for your site: [[screen.config.15#Cache Settings|Global Configuration - Cache Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Cache|Tools}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.weblinks.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12919</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.weblinks.categories.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.weblinks.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12919"/>
		<updated>2009-01-27T17:28:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[screen.weblinkcategories.15|Web Link Category Manager]]. To add a new Web Link Category, and click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Web Link Category, click the Category&#039;s Name, or check the Category&#039;s checkbox and press the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add a new Web Link Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Web Link Category before you can create a Web Link. Also, Web Link Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen for adding and editing Web Link Categories looks the same screen used to create Article Categories. However, for Web Link Categories, the only required field is &#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;. Published, Section, Category Order, and Access Level are not used. An Image and Description may be entered, but they are not displayed on the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:web_link_category_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Details Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; This field is not used for Web Link Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Section.&#039;&#039;&#039; This displays &#039;N/A&#039; for not applicable, since Sections are not used for Web Links.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category Order.&#039;&#039;&#039; This field is only used for ordering at the weblinks management.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level.&#039;&#039;&#039; This field is not used for Web Link Categories. &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Optional description for the Web Link Category. This description is just for your information and will not display on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image Button.&#039;&#039;&#039; This command is not normally used for Web Link Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Web Links: [[screen.weblink.15|Web Link Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Web Links Categories: [[screen.weblinkcategories.15|Web Link Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Web Link Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.newsfeeds.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12916</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.newsfeeds.categories.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.newsfeeds.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12916"/>
		<updated>2009-01-27T13:01:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Column Headers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds &amp;amp;rarr; Categories&#039;&#039;&#039;. Once at the [[Screen.newsfeedscategories.15|News Feeds Category Manager]], from the toolbar, select &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The New/Edit page for the News Feeds Category Manager is a create/edit screen that allows website administrators to create or edit News Feed Categories. Categories allow a broken down structure of News Feeds. &#039;&#039;You must have at least one category before you can create any News Feeds!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:News_feed_category_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section&#039;&#039;&#039;. Not used here.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Category Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Where this category shall be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right, you will see this toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:banner_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You must create at least one News Feed Category before you can create any News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with News Feeds: [[screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|News Feed Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.newsfeeds.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12915</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.newsfeeds.categories.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.newsfeeds.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12915"/>
		<updated>2009-01-27T13:00:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Column Headers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds &amp;amp;rarr; Categories&#039;&#039;&#039;. Once at the [[Screen.newsfeedscategories.15|News Feeds Category Manager]], from the toolbar, select &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The New/Edit page for the News Feeds Category Manager is a create/edit screen that allows website administrators to create or edit News Feed Categories. Categories allow a broken down structure of News Feeds. &#039;&#039;You must have at least one category before you can create any News Feeds!&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:News_feed_category_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section&#039;&#039;&#039;. Not used here.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right, you will see this toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:banner_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You must create at least one News Feed Category before you can create any News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with News Feeds: [[screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|News Feed Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.contact_details.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12914</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.contact details.categories.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.contact_details.categories.edit.15&amp;diff=12914"/>
		<updated>2009-01-27T07:52:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to the [[screen.contact_details.categories.15|Contact Category Manager]]. To add a new Contact Category, and click on the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar. To edit an existing Contact Category, click on the Category&#039;s Name, or check the Category&#039;s checkbox and press the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can add a new Contact Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Contact Category before you can create a Contact. Also, Contact Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and so on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the screen for adding and editing Contact Categories is the same screen used to create Article Categories. However, for Contact Categories, the only required field is &#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;. Published, Section, Category Order, and Access Level are not used. An Image and Description may be entered, but they are not displayed on the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contact_category_edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Details==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Details Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Published.&#039;&#039;&#039; Will be used at selectable lists (drop downs).&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Section.&#039;&#039;&#039; This displays &#039;N/A&#039; for not applicable, since Sections are not used for Contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category Order.&#039;&#039;&#039; Is used at select lists (drop downs) and at the manager site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level.&#039;&#039;&#039; This field is yet not used for Contact Categories. &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}} You will not normally use an Image for a Contact Category, since it will not display on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Optional description for the Contact Category. This description is just for your information and will not display on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image Button.&#039;&#039;&#039; This command is not normally used for Contact Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_edit_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Contacts: [[screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Contact Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.contactmanager.15&amp;diff=12880</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.contactmanager.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.contactmanager.15&amp;diff=12880"/>
		<updated>2009-01-26T15:00:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Toolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Components &amp;amp;rarr; Contacts &amp;amp;rarr; Contacts&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation, or select the &amp;quot;Contacts&amp;quot; link from the [[screen.contact_details.categories.15|Contacts Manager - Categories]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Manager screen allows you to add contact information to your Joomla! site. You can enter information such as name, address, phone and e-mail. You can also link contacts to registered users. Afterwards, you can use the [[Screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]] to create front-end links to the the contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contact_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}} &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the Contact. You can click on the Name to open the Contact for editing.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}} &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Category that this Contact belongs to. Clicking on the Category Title opens the Category for editing. See [[screen.contact_details.categories.edit.15|Contact Category Manager - New/Edit]]. Note that Contact Categories are separate from other Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, Newsfeeds, and Web Links.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked to User&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username this contact is linked to (if applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display #}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Contacts_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Delete}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters.&#039;&#039;&#039; See [[#Global Configuration|Global Configuration]] section below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Configuration== &lt;br /&gt;
Click the Parameters button to open the Contacts Global Configuration window. This window allows you to set default parameters for Contacts, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contacts_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Icons/Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether an Icon, Text or nothing is displayed next to the Contact fields.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Address Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Telephone Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Mobile Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Fax Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Miscellaneous Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Contact&#039;s Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show E-mail Address}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Telephone Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Mobile Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Fax Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enable vCard}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned E-mail}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Subject}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Session Check}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Custom Reply}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items by typing in part of the Title or the ID number. You can also select a combination of Category and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Category and Published State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 2 drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:banner_filter.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching both selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*You need to add at least one Category for your Contacts &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; you can add your first Contact. Categories are added using the [[Screen.contact_details.categories.15|Contacts Category Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add or edit Contacts: [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15|Contact Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Contact Categories: [[screen.contact_details.categories.15|Category Manager (Contacts)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To work with Users: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Contact Manager|Components}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Other_Categories&amp;diff=12872</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen column header Other Categories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Other_Categories&amp;diff=12872"/>
		<updated>2009-01-25T09:07:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Other Categories.&#039;&#039;&#039; Show also other categories. &#039;&#039;Note: there must be at least one item assigned in the other category/categories to show it!&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15&amp;diff=12868</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15&amp;diff=12868"/>
		<updated>2009-01-24T10:53:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Default Login Layout */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How To Access==&lt;br /&gt;
To access the New Menu Creation wizard, navigate to the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]] for the desired menu and press the New button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen, you will select the Menu Item Type for this Menu Item. The Menu Item Type determines the type of page that will display when this menu choice is selected by the User.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_Item_New.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you install one or more Joomla! extensions, these extensions may add new Menu Item Types. In this case, your list will have additional types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Types==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Item Types are organized into four groups: Internal Link, External Link, Separator, and Alias. Internal Links are the most commonly used and will display pages on your web site. External Links are used to display links to external web sites. Separators are used to place a graphic or other separator between menu options. Alias Item Types are used to point back to an already existing Menu Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Articles==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Articles link is selected, it expands to show the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_articles.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Archived Article List===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of Articles that have been Archived and can be searched by date. Archived articles are no longer published but are still stored on the site. Articles are Archived using the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]] screen. Note that Articles assigned to the &amp;quot;Uncategoried&amp;quot; Section will not show on the Archived Article List layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type Archived Article List allows you to set the sort order of Archived Articles, as shown in the screenshot below. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_archive_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Default order is most recent first. The Order option sorts Articles by the Order column in the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single article on the page. Note: This layout replaces the &#039;&#039;Static Content&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Link Content&#039;&#039; used in Joomla! version 1.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Layout has one Parameter, the Article to include in the layout, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_article_parameters.png|frame|center]]Press the Select button to select the desired Article for this layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Submission Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to submit an article. This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors groups. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type has no Basic or Advanced Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Blog Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to a specific Category, in a blog layout.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to one Category, in a list layout. A list layout lists each Article&#039;s Title and allows the User to link to the Article. An example is shown below:[[Image:category_list_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_list_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number of Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Format}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter Field}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Category_list_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pagination.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show Pagination support. Pagination provides page links at the bottom of the page that allow the User to navigate to additional pages. These are needed if the Articles will not fit on one page. An example is shown below.[[Image:blog_layout_pagination.png|frame|center]]The following options are available.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Hide:&#039;&#039; Pagination links not shown. Note: In this case, Users will not be able to navigate to additional pages.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Show:&#039;&#039; Pagination links shown if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display Select:&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide the Display # drop-down list box. This allows you to limit the number of Articles listed on one page.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front Page Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all Articles that have been published to the Front Page, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Front Page Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles belonging to one Section, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles by Category in one Section, in a list layout. This layout shows a list Categories in the Section. An example is shown below: [[Image:section_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each Category links to a page that is similar to a Category List Layout, providing links to each Article in that Category. Note that you cannot directly set parameters to control the display of these Category List Layouts from within this screen. However, it is possible to do this using separate Menu Items for each Category. See the article [[How_to_control_Category_List_layouts_when_drilling_from_a_Section_Layout|How to control Category List layouts when drilling from a Section Layout]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category List - Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Empty Categories in Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Articles===&lt;br /&gt;
All Articles Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. For each of these components, you may select one of three options: No/Hide, Yes/Show, or Use Global. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:Article_parameters_component.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These values work with the values set in the [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] and the values set in the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] to determine the action on the page. The parameters in all three places work together in a hierarchy, as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
# The value from the Parameters - Advanced section of the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the value above is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from the Parameters - Component section of the [[screen.menus.type.15|Menu Item Type]] (this screen) is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If &#039;&#039;both&#039;&#039; of the values above are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] is used to determine the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual Parameters are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Contacts==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Contacts link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_contacts.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contact Category Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all of the published Contacts in a given Category. Note that Contact Categories are separate from Article Categories. Contacts and Contact Categories are entered by selecting Components/Contacts. See [[screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Menu_Item.Contact.Category_Layout_Params.Basic.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Number of contacts to show.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Contact Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show the details of a single Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Standard Contact Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:contact_standard_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Drop Down}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Category in Breadcrumbs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Contacts===&lt;br /&gt;
All Contacts Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is &lt;br /&gt;
shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contact_parameters_component1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] and the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]]. The setting in the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]] takes priority. If the setting there is &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting here takes effect. If both of these settings are &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] takes effect.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons/Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Address Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Telephone Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Mobile Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Fax Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Miscellaneous Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Contact&#039;s Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show E-mail Address}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Telephone Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Mobile Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Fax Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enable vCard}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned E-mail}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Subject}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Session Check}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Custom Reply}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - News Feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
When the News Feeds link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_news_feeds.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below. Note that News Feed Categories are separate from Article Categories. News Feeds and News Feed Categories are entered by selecting Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds. See [[screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of all News Feed Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_list_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|News Feed Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of News Feeds in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_layout_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Single Feed Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single News Feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Single Feed Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below. [[Image:news_single_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for News Feeds===&lt;br /&gt;
All News Feed Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:News_feed_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Name Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Articles Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Item Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Word Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Polls==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Polls link is selected, it expands to display the Poll Layout. This is used to show the results of a Poll, as shown below.[[Image:poll_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Poll Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below.[[Image:poll_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Poll.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the desired Poll from the drop-down list box. Polls are entered using the [[screen.polls.15|Poll Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Search==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Search link is selected, it expands to display the Search layout. This is used to show the Search form and the Search results as shown below. [[Image:search_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Search Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:search_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Search Areas.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to show the Search Areas check boxes. These check boxes allow a User to limit the search to any combination of Articles, Web Links, Contacts, Categories, Sections, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Date and Time the Article was created when displaying the Search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Component&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search Layout has the following options under Parameters - Component:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:search_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These setting work with the settings in the [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Yes&#039;, &#039;No&#039;, &#039;Show&#039;, or &#039;Hide&#039;, then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Gather Search Statistics.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to enable the gathering of Search Statistics. Yes/No/Use Global.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to Hide or Show the Created Date for an Article. This parameter can be overridden at the Menu Item and Article level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - User==&lt;br /&gt;
When the User link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_user.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Login Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to login to the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_login_layout.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Default Login Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:default_login_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Title of this Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Title to display as the Page Title. If blank, the Title of the Menu Item will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page that the User will be redirected to after a successful login. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful login.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Login Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful login. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;LOGIN_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Login Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Page Title.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display at the top of the Page. If blank, the Menu Item Title will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page the User will be directed to after a successful logout. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful logout.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful logout. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;LOGOUT_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Logout Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Registration Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to register for the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_user_registration_layout.png|frame|center]]This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Remind Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to receive an e-mail with their username, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_remind_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Reset Layout===  &lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to reset their password, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_reset_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default User Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a welcome message when the User enters the registered zone. This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User Form Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Allows a User to edit their account details, choose a new password, change the language for both the Back-end and Front-end, and modify their time zone. Users with publishing permissions may choose a text editor. Users with administrator permissions may choose the Help Site they want to use in the back-end. The layout for users in the Registered and Author groups is shown below.[[Image:user_form_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Web Links==&lt;br /&gt;
When the &#039;Web Links&#039; link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_web_links.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Category List Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all the Web Link Categories. The User may click on a Category to see the links for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Link Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:web_link_category_list_parameters1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all of the Web Links in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Category_list_web_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Web Link Category for this Page. Select a Web Link Category from the drop-down list box. Note that these Categories are different from Article Categories and are entered from the selection Components/Web Links/Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Submission Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a form that allows a Registered User to submit a Web Link, as shown below. [[Image:submit_web_link.png|frame|center]] This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors group. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Web Links===&lt;br /&gt;
All Web Links Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:web_link_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]]. The a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Introduction}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Descriptions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Other Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Target}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Wrapper==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Wrapper link is selected, it expands to display the Wrapper layout. This is used to show an external web site inside a page in your web site, using an HTML [[:Wikipedia:IFrame|IFrame]]. The external web site is contained inside the Wrapper. You can navigate to different pages in the wrapped web site, all inside the page of your web site. The example below shows the Joomla! web site inside a Wrapper. [[Image:menu_item_type_wrapper.jpg|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Wrapper Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:wrapper_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrapper URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; URL for the web site to open inside the Wrapper IFrame.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Scroll Bars.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include horizontal and vertical scroll bars. Auto will add the scroll bars automatically when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width.&#039;&#039;&#039; Width of the IFrame Window. You can enter in a number of pixels or enter in a percentage by including a &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; at the end of the number. For example, &amp;quot;550&amp;quot; means 550 pixels. &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot; means 75% of the page width.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height.&#039;&#039;&#039; Height of the IFrame window, either in pixels or percent (by adding &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; to the number).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External Link==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type is used to create a menu choice that links to an external web site or page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The External Link has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Separator==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item type creates a Menu Placeholder or a Separator within a Menu. These can be used to break up a long Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Separator has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alias==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type creates a Link to an existing Menu Item. It allows you to have identical Menu Items on two or more different Menus without duplicating the settings. So, for example, if you change a parameter of a Menu Item that has an Alias linked to it, the Alias will automatically acquire the same change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Alias has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Menu Item that this Alias links to. Select the Menu Item from the drop-down list box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Details and Parameters - System==&lt;br /&gt;
When any of the Menu Item Types listed above are selected, a details screen similar to the one below displays. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_layout1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Menu Item Details&#039; and the &#039;Parameters - System&#039; parts are the same for each Menu Item. These are documented below. The &#039;Parameters - Component&#039; part is different for each Internal Link group -- Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, Polls, Search, User, Web Links, and Wrapper. Therefore, these are documented in each group&#039;s section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Parameters - Basic section is different for each Menu Type. Also, some Menu Types contain a Parameters - Advanced section, which is also different for each Menu Type. These are documented for each individual Menu Type above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display in}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Parent Item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order (Details)}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|On Click, Open in}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section, shown below, allows setting additional parameters. [[Image:menu_item_parameters_system.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Class Suffix}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|SSL Enabled}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for Articles and Contacts can be set at 3 different levels:&lt;br /&gt;
*# the individual Article or Contact New or Edit screen (Article:[Edit] or Contact:[Edit]).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Menu Item that displays the Article or Contact (this screen).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Global Configuration screen, accessed using the Parameters button on the Article Manager and Contact Manager screens.&lt;br /&gt;
: The parameter set for the individual Article or Contact always takes first priority. If the individual parameter is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter set in the Menu Item takes priority. If both of these are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter in the Global Configuration takes priority.&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for News Feeds, Search, and Web Links work in a similar way, except that they are only set in this screen and in the Global Configuration screens. No parameters are set for individual items of these types. As with Articles and Contacts, the Menu Item setting takes priority over the Global Configuration setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the Global Configuration parameters whenever possible. This way, if you want to change a parameter setting for all content items, you can just change it once in the Global Configuration and it will automatically be reflected in all affected content items.&lt;br /&gt;
*Often on the Front Page component, Joomla! users do not want their Articles to display in 2 columns, which is the default value. The first Article displays in one column (using the full width), but subsequent Articles display in 2 columns. This can be adjusted by changing the values of the Parameters - Basic for the Front Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are trying to manually change the order of articles on the Front Page or in a Blog or List Layout, make sure that you have the Primary Order and Category Order parameters set correctly in the Parameters - Advanced Section. If these parameters are set incorrectly, changing the order manually will have no effect on the order on the web page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
*{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
*{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banners: [[Screen.banners.15|Banner Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Categories: [[Screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Contacts: [[Screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a &#039;main_menu&#039; Module to Add a Menu to One or More Pages: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with News Feeds: [[Screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Polls: [[Screen.polls.15|Polls Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Item Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15&amp;diff=12813</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15&amp;diff=12813"/>
		<updated>2009-01-21T15:52:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Contact Category Layout */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How To Access==&lt;br /&gt;
To access the New Menu Creation wizard, navigate to the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]] for the desired menu and press the New button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen, you will select the Menu Item Type for this Menu Item. The Menu Item Type determines the type of page that will display when this menu choice is selected by the User.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_Item_New.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you install one or more Joomla! extensions, these extensions may add new Menu Item Types. In this case, your list will have additional types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Types==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Item Types are organized into four groups: Internal Link, External Link, Separator, and Alias. Internal Links are the most commonly used and will display pages on your web site. External Links are used to display links to external web sites. Separators are used to place a graphic or other separator between menu options. Alias Item Types are used to point back to an already existing Menu Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Articles==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Articles link is selected, it expands to show the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_articles.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Archived Article List===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of Articles that have been Archived and can be searched by date. Archived articles are no longer published but are still stored on the site. Articles are Archived using the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]] screen. Note that Articles assigned to the &amp;quot;Uncategoried&amp;quot; Section will not show on the Archived Article List layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type Archived Article List allows you to set the sort order of Archived Articles, as shown in the screenshot below. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_archive_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Default order is most recent first. The Order option sorts Articles by the Order column in the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single article on the page. Note: This layout replaces the &#039;&#039;Static Content&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Link Content&#039;&#039; used in Joomla! version 1.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Layout has one Parameter, the Article to include in the layout, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_article_parameters.png|frame|center]]Press the Select button to select the desired Article for this layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Submission Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to submit an article. This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors groups. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type has no Basic or Advanced Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Blog Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to a specific Category, in a blog layout.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to one Category, in a list layout. A list layout lists each Article&#039;s Title and allows the User to link to the Article. An example is shown below:[[Image:category_list_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_list_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number of Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Format}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter Field}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Category_list_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pagination.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show Pagination support. Pagination provides page links at the bottom of the page that allow the User to navigate to additional pages. These are needed if the Articles will not fit on one page. An example is shown below.[[Image:blog_layout_pagination.png|frame|center]]The following options are available.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Hide:&#039;&#039; Pagination links not shown. Note: In this case, Users will not be able to navigate to additional pages.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Show:&#039;&#039; Pagination links shown if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display Select:&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide the Display # drop-down list box. This allows you to limit the number of Articles listed on one page.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front Page Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all Articles that have been published to the Front Page, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Front Page Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles belonging to one Section, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles by Category in one Section, in a list layout. This layout shows a list Categories in the Section. An example is shown below: [[Image:section_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each Category links to a page that is similar to a Category List Layout, providing links to each Article in that Category. Note that you cannot directly set parameters to control the display of these Category List Layouts from within this screen. However, it is possible to do this using separate Menu Items for each Category. See the article [[How_to_control_Category_List_layouts_when_drilling_from_a_Section_Layout|How to control Category List layouts when drilling from a Section Layout]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category List - Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Empty Categories in Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Articles===&lt;br /&gt;
All Articles Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. For each of these components, you may select one of three options: No/Hide, Yes/Show, or Use Global. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:Article_parameters_component.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These values work with the values set in the [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] and the values set in the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] to determine the action on the page. The parameters in all three places work together in a hierarchy, as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
# The value from the Parameters - Advanced section of the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the value above is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from the Parameters - Component section of the [[screen.menus.type.15|Menu Item Type]] (this screen) is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If &#039;&#039;both&#039;&#039; of the values above are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] is used to determine the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual Parameters are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Contacts==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Contacts link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_contacts.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contact Category Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all of the published Contacts in a given Category. Note that Contact Categories are separate from Article Categories. Contacts and Contact Categories are entered by selecting Components/Contacts. See [[screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Menu_Item.Contact.Category_Layout_Params.Basic.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;# Links&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of contacts to show.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Contact Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show the details of a single Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Standard Contact Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:contact_standard_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Drop Down}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Category in Breadcrumbs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Contacts===&lt;br /&gt;
All Contacts Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is &lt;br /&gt;
shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contact_parameters_component1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] and the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]]. The setting in the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]] takes priority. If the setting there is &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting here takes effect. If both of these settings are &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] takes effect.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons/Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Address Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Telephone Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Mobile Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Fax Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Miscellaneous Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Contact&#039;s Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show E-mail Address}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Telephone Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Mobile Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Fax Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enable vCard}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned E-mail}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Subject}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Session Check}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Custom Reply}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - News Feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
When the News Feeds link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_news_feeds.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below. Note that News Feed Categories are separate from Article Categories. News Feeds and News Feed Categories are entered by selecting Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds. See [[screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of all News Feed Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_list_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|News Feed Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of News Feeds in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_layout_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Single Feed Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single News Feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Single Feed Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below. [[Image:news_single_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for News Feeds===&lt;br /&gt;
All News Feed Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:News_feed_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Name Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Articles Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Item Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Word Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Polls==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Polls link is selected, it expands to display the Poll Layout. This is used to show the results of a Poll, as shown below.[[Image:poll_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Poll Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below.[[Image:poll_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Poll.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the desired Poll from the drop-down list box. Polls are entered using the [[screen.polls.15|Poll Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Search==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Search link is selected, it expands to display the Search layout. This is used to show the Search form and the Search results as shown below. [[Image:search_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Search Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:search_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Search Areas.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to show the Search Areas check boxes. These check boxes allow a User to limit the search to any combination of Articles, Web Links, Contacts, Categories, Sections, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Date and Time the Article was created when displaying the Search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Component&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search Layout has the following options under Parameters - Component:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:search_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These setting work with the settings in the [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Yes&#039;, &#039;No&#039;, &#039;Show&#039;, or &#039;Hide&#039;, then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Gather Search Statistics.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to enable the gathering of Search Statistics. Yes/No/Use Global.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to Hide or Show the Created Date for an Article. This parameter can be overridden at the Menu Item and Article level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - User==&lt;br /&gt;
When the User link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_user.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Login Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to login to the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_login_layout.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Default Login Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:default_login_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Title of this Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Title to display as the Page Title. If blank, the Title of the Menu Item will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page that the User will be redirected to after a successful login. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful login.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Login Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful login. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;_LOGIN_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Login Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Page Title.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display at the top of the Page. If blank, the Menu Item Title will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page the User will be directed to after a successful logout. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful logout.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful logout. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;_LOGOUT_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Logout Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Registration Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to register for the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_user_registration_layout.png|frame|center]]This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Remind Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to receive an e-mail with their username, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_remind_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Reset Layout===  &lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to reset their password, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_reset_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default User Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a welcome message when the User enters the registered zone. This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User Form Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Allows a User to edit their account details, choose a new password, change the language for both the Back-end and Front-end, and modify their time zone. Users with publishing permissions may choose a text editor. Users with administrator permissions may choose the Help Site they want to use in the back-end. The layout for users in the Registered and Author groups is shown below.[[Image:user_form_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Web Links==&lt;br /&gt;
When the &#039;Web Links&#039; link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_web_links.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Category List Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all the Web Link Categories. The User may click on a Category to see the links for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Link Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:web_link_category_list_parameters1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all of the Web Links in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Category_list_web_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Web Link Category for this Page. Select a Web Link Category from the drop-down list box. Note that these Categories are different from Article Categories and are entered from the selection Components/Web Links/Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Submission Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a form that allows a Registered User to submit a Web Link, as shown below. [[Image:submit_web_link.png|frame|center]] This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors group. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Web Links===&lt;br /&gt;
All Web Links Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:web_link_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]]. The a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Introduction}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Descriptions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Other Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Target}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Wrapper==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Wrapper link is selected, it expands to display the Wrapper layout. This is used to show an external web site inside a page in your web site, using an HTML [[:Wikipedia:IFrame|IFrame]]. The external web site is contained inside the Wrapper. You can navigate to different pages in the wrapped web site, all inside the page of your web site. The example below shows the Joomla! web site inside a Wrapper. [[Image:menu_item_type_wrapper.jpg|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Wrapper Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:wrapper_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrapper URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; URL for the web site to open inside the Wrapper IFrame.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Scroll Bars.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include horizontal and vertical scroll bars. Auto will add the scroll bars automatically when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width.&#039;&#039;&#039; Width of the IFrame Window. You can enter in a number of pixels or enter in a percentage by including a &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; at the end of the number. For example, &amp;quot;550&amp;quot; means 550 pixels. &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot; means 75% of the page width.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height.&#039;&#039;&#039; Height of the IFrame window, either in pixels or percent (by adding &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; to the number).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External Link==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type is used to create a menu choice that links to an external web site or page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The External Link has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Separator==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item type creates a Menu Placeholder or a Separator within a Menu. These can be used to break up a long Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Separator has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alias==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type creates a Link to an existing Menu Item. It allows you to have identical Menu Items on two or more different Menus without duplicating the settings. So, for example, if you change a parameter of a Menu Item that has an Alias linked to it, the Alias will automatically acquire the same change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Alias has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Menu Item that this Alias links to. Select the Menu Item from the drop-down list box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Details and Parameters - System==&lt;br /&gt;
When any of the Menu Item Types listed above are selected, a details screen similar to the one below displays. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_layout1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Menu Item Details&#039; and the &#039;Parameters - System&#039; parts are the same for each Menu Item. These are documented below. The &#039;Parameters - Component&#039; part is different for each Internal Link group -- Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, Polls, Search, User, Web Links, and Wrapper. Therefore, these are documented in each group&#039;s section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Parameters - Basic section is different for each Menu Type. Also, some Menu Types contain a Parameters - Advanced section, which is also different for each Menu Type. These are documented for each individual Menu Type above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display in}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Parent Item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order (Details)}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|On Click, Open in}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section, shown below, allows setting additional parameters. [[Image:menu_item_parameters_system.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Class Suffix}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|SSL Enabled}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for Articles and Contacts can be set at 3 different levels:&lt;br /&gt;
*# the individual Article or Contact New or Edit screen (Article:[Edit] or Contact:[Edit]).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Menu Item that displays the Article or Contact (this screen).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Global Configuration screen, accessed using the Parameters button on the Article Manager and Contact Manager screens.&lt;br /&gt;
: The parameter set for the individual Article or Contact always takes first priority. If the individual parameter is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter set in the Menu Item takes priority. If both of these are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter in the Global Configuration takes priority.&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for News Feeds, Search, and Web Links work in a similar way, except that they are only set in this screen and in the Global Configuration screens. No parameters are set for individual items of these types. As with Articles and Contacts, the Menu Item setting takes priority over the Global Configuration setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the Global Configuration parameters whenever possible. This way, if you want to change a parameter setting for all content items, you can just change it once in the Global Configuration and it will automatically be reflected in all affected content items.&lt;br /&gt;
*Often on the Front Page component, Joomla! users do not want their Articles to display in 2 columns, which is the default value. The first Article displays in one column (using the full width), but subsequent Articles display in 2 columns. This can be adjusted by changing the values of the Parameters - Basic for the Front Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are trying to manually change the order of articles on the Front Page or in a Blog or List Layout, make sure that you have the Primary Order and Category Order parameters set correctly in the Parameters - Advanced Section. If these parameters are set incorrectly, changing the order manually will have no effect on the order on the web page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
*{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
*{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banners: [[Screen.banners.15|Banner Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Categories: [[Screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Contacts: [[Screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a &#039;main_menu&#039; Module to Add a Menu to One or More Pages: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with News Feeds: [[Screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Polls: [[Screen.polls.15|Polls Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Item Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15&amp;diff=12812</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.edit.15&amp;diff=12812"/>
		<updated>2009-01-21T15:44:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Contact Category Layout */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How To Access==&lt;br /&gt;
To access the New Menu Creation wizard, navigate to the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]] for the desired menu and press the New button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen, you will select the Menu Item Type for this Menu Item. The Menu Item Type determines the type of page that will display when this menu choice is selected by the User.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_Item_New.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you install one or more Joomla! extensions, these extensions may add new Menu Item Types. In this case, your list will have additional types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Types==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Item Types are organized into four groups: Internal Link, External Link, Separator, and Alias. Internal Links are the most commonly used and will display pages on your web site. External Links are used to display links to external web sites. Separators are used to place a graphic or other separator between menu options. Alias Item Types are used to point back to an already existing Menu Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Articles==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Articles link is selected, it expands to show the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_articles.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Archived Article List===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of Articles that have been Archived and can be searched by date. Archived articles are no longer published but are still stored on the site. Articles are Archived using the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]] screen. Note that Articles assigned to the &amp;quot;Uncategoried&amp;quot; Section will not show on the Archived Article List layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type Archived Article List allows you to set the sort order of Archived Articles, as shown in the screenshot below. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_archive_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Default order is most recent first. The Order option sorts Articles by the Order column in the [[screen.content.15|Article Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single article on the page. Note: This layout replaces the &#039;&#039;Static Content&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Link Content&#039;&#039; used in Joomla! version 1.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Layout has one Parameter, the Article to include in the layout, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_article_parameters.png|frame|center]]Press the Select button to select the desired Article for this layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Article Submission Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to submit an article. This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors groups. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type has no Basic or Advanced Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Blog Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to a specific Category, in a blog layout.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show articles belonging to one Category, in a list layout. A list layout lists each Article&#039;s Title and allows the User to link to the Article. An example is shown below:[[Image:category_list_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_list_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number of Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date Format}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Filter Field}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Category_list_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pagination.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show Pagination support. Pagination provides page links at the bottom of the page that allow the User to navigate to additional pages. These are needed if the Articles will not fit on one page. An example is shown below.[[Image:blog_layout_pagination.png|frame|center]]The following options are available.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Hide:&#039;&#039; Pagination links not shown. Note: In this case, Users will not be able to navigate to additional pages.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;Show:&#039;&#039; Pagination links shown if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display Select:&#039;&#039;&#039; Show or Hide the Display # drop-down list box. This allows you to limit the number of Articles listed on one page.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front Page Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all Articles that have been published to the Front Page, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Front Page Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:front_page_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Blog Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles belonging to one Section, in a Blog Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Blog Layout}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_blog_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Leading}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Intro}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Columns}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Blog Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Front_page_parameters_advanced.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Multi Column Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Pagination Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show Articles by Category in one Section, in a list layout. This layout shows a list Categories in the Section. An example is shown below: [[Image:section_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each Category links to a page that is similar to a Category List Layout, providing links to each Article in that Category. Note that you cannot directly set parameters to control the display of these Category List Layouts from within this screen. However, it is possible to do this using separate Menu Items for each Category. See the article [[How_to_control_Category_List_layouts_when_drilling_from_a_Section_Layout|How to control Category List layouts when drilling from a Section Layout]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Image Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category List - Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Empty Categories in Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Advanced&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Section Layout has the following Advanced Parameters, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:section_layout_advanced_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Primary Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Articles===&lt;br /&gt;
All Articles Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. For each of these components, you may select one of three options: No/Hide, Yes/Show, or Use Global. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:Article_parameters_component.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These values work with the values set in the [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] and the values set in the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] to determine the action on the page. The parameters in all three places work together in a hierarchy, as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
# The value from the Parameters - Advanced section of the [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager New/Edit]] is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the value above is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from the Parameters - Component section of the [[screen.menus.type.15|Menu Item Type]] (this screen) is examined. If this value is set to Yes/Show or No/Hide, then that action is taken and no further checking is done.&lt;br /&gt;
# If &#039;&#039;both&#039;&#039; of the values above are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot; then the value from [[Screen.content.15|Article Manager/Parameters]] is used to determine the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual Parameters are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Contacts==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Contacts link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_contacts.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contact Category Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show all of the published Contacts in a given Category. Note that Contact Categories are separate from Article Categories. Contacts and Contact Categories are entered by selecting Components/Contacts. See [[screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Contact Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Menu_Item.Contact.Category_Layout_Params.Basic.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard Contact Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show the details of a single Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Standard Contact Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:contact_standard_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Drop Down}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Category in Breadcrumbs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Contacts===&lt;br /&gt;
All Contacts Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is &lt;br /&gt;
shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:contact_parameters_component1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] and the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]]. The setting in the [[screen.contactmanager.edit.15#Contact Parameters|Contact Manager - New/Edit]] takes priority. If the setting there is &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting here takes effect. If both of these settings are &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.contactmanager.15#Contacts Parameters|Contacts: Global Configuration]] takes effect.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icons/Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Address Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Contact E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Telephone Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Mobile Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Fax Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Miscellaneous Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Contact&#039;s Position}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show E-mail Address}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Telephone Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Mobile Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Fax Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enable vCard}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned E-mail}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Subject}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Banned Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Session Check}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Custom Reply}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - News Feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
When the News Feeds link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_news_feeds.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below. Note that News Feed Categories are separate from Article Categories. News Feeds and News Feed Categories are entered by selecting Components &amp;amp;rarr; News Feeds. See [[screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]] and [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of all News Feed Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_list_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|News Feed Description Hide Show}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a list of News Feeds in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:news_category_layout_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Parameter}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Limit Box}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Single Feed Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Used to show a single News Feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Single Feed Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below. [[Image:news_single_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for News Feeds===&lt;br /&gt;
All News Feed Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:News_feed_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.newsfeeds.15#Global Configuration|News Feeds: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Name Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Articles Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|No. Category Items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Feed Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Item Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Word Count}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Polls==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Polls link is selected, it expands to display the Poll Layout. This is used to show the results of a Poll, as shown below.[[Image:poll_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Poll Layout has the following Basic Parameter, as shown below.[[Image:poll_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Poll.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the desired Poll from the drop-down list box. Polls are entered using the [[screen.polls.15|Poll Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Search==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Search link is selected, it expands to display the Search layout. This is used to show the Search form and the Search results as shown below. [[Image:search_layout_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Search Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:search_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Search Areas.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to show the Search Areas check boxes. These check boxes allow a User to limit the search to any combination of Articles, Web Links, Contacts, Categories, Sections, and News Feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Date and Time the Article was created when displaying the Search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Component&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search Layout has the following options under Parameters - Component:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:search_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These setting work with the settings in the [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]]. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Yes&#039;, &#039;No&#039;, &#039;Show&#039;, or &#039;Hide&#039;, then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.stats.searches.15|Search Statistics]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Gather Search Statistics.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to enable the gathering of Search Statistics. Yes/No/Use Global.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Created Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether to Hide or Show the Created Date for an Article. This parameter can be overridden at the Menu Item and Article level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - User==&lt;br /&gt;
When the User link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_type_user.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Login Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to login to the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_login_layout.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Default Login Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below.[[Image:default_login_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Title of this Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Title to display as the Page Title. If blank, the Title of the Menu Item will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page that the User will be redirected to after a successful login. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful login.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Login Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful login. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;_LOGIN_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Login Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Login Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Page Title.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Page Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display at the top of the Page. If blank, the Menu Item Title will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Redirection URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; The URL of the Page the User will be directed to after a successful logout. If blank, the Front Page will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout JS Message.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the JavaScript pop-up that indicates a successful logout.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hide or Show the Logout Description Text, entered below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Description Text.&#039;&#039;&#039; Text to display on a successful logout. If blank, the variable &amp;quot;_LOGOUT_DESCRIPTION&amp;quot; will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image for the Logout Page. This must be in the &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Logout Image Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Align image to the left or right of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Registration Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows a user to register for the site, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_user_registration_layout.png|frame|center]]This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Remind Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to receive an e-mail with their username, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_remind_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Reset Layout===  &lt;br /&gt;
Allows the user to reset their password, as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:default_reset_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default User Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a welcome message when the User enters the registered zone. This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User Form Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Allows a User to edit their account details, choose a new password, change the language for both the Back-end and Front-end, and modify their time zone. Users with publishing permissions may choose a text editor. Users with administrator permissions may choose the Help Site they want to use in the back-end. The layout for users in the Registered and Author groups is shown below.[[Image:user_form_layout.png|frame|center]] This Layout has no unique Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Web Links==&lt;br /&gt;
When the &#039;Web Links&#039; link is selected, it expands to display the options shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:menu_item_web_links.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Category List Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all the Web Link Categories. The User may click on a Category to see the links for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Link Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:web_link_category_list_parameters1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Image Align}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Category List Layout===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a list of all of the Web Links in a Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Category List Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:Category_list_web_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Web Link Category for this Page. Select a Web Link Category from the drop-down list box. Note that these Categories are different from Article Categories and are entered from the selection Components/Web Links/Categories.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show a Feed Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Web Link Submission Layout=== &lt;br /&gt;
Shows a form that allows a Registered User to submit a Web Link, as shown below. [[Image:submit_web_link.png|frame|center]] This only works for users who are members of the Authors, Publishers, or Editors group. Members of the Registered or Public groups will not be able to submit articles even if this page is visible to them. If the page is visible to a user without the correct access level, they will get an error message when trying to load the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parameters - Component for Web Links===&lt;br /&gt;
All Web Links Layouts have the same options under Parameters - Component. An example of this section is shown below.[[Image:web_link_parameters_component1.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These settings work with the settings in the [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]]. The a parameter here is set to &#039;Hide&#039; or &#039;Show&#039; then that action is taken. If a parameter here is set to &#039;Use Global&#039;, then the setting in [[screen.weblink.15#Global Configuration|Web Links: Global Configuration]] is used.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Introduction}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Web Links Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link Descriptions}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Other Categories}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Table Headings}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Target}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Link - Wrapper==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Wrapper link is selected, it expands to display the Wrapper layout. This is used to show an external web site inside a page in your web site, using an HTML [[:Wikipedia:IFrame|IFrame]]. The external web site is contained inside the Wrapper. You can navigate to different pages in the wrapped web site, all inside the page of your web site. The example below shows the Joomla! web site inside a Wrapper. [[Image:menu_item_type_wrapper.jpg|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Wrapper Layout has the following Basic Parameters, as shown below. [[Image:wrapper_basic_parameters.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrapper URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; URL for the web site to open inside the Wrapper IFrame.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Scroll Bars.&#039;&#039;&#039; Whether or not to include horizontal and vertical scroll bars. Auto will add the scroll bars automatically when needed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width.&#039;&#039;&#039; Width of the IFrame Window. You can enter in a number of pixels or enter in a percentage by including a &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; at the end of the number. For example, &amp;quot;550&amp;quot; means 550 pixels. &amp;quot;75%&amp;quot; means 75% of the page width.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height.&#039;&#039;&#039; Height of the IFrame window, either in pixels or percent (by adding &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; to the number).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External Link==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type is used to create a menu choice that links to an external web site or page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The External Link has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Separator==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item type creates a Menu Placeholder or a Separator within a Menu. These can be used to break up a long Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Separator has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Alias==&lt;br /&gt;
This Menu Item Type creates a Link to an existing Menu Item. It allows you to have identical Menu Items on two or more different Menus without duplicating the settings. So, for example, if you change a parameter of a Menu Item that has an Alias linked to it, the Alias will automatically acquire the same change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - Basic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Alias has one Basic Parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item.&#039;&#039;&#039; The Menu Item that this Alias links to. Select the Menu Item from the drop-down list box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Item Details and Parameters - System==&lt;br /&gt;
When any of the Menu Item Types listed above are selected, a details screen similar to the one below displays. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:category_blog_layout1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;Menu Item Details&#039; and the &#039;Parameters - System&#039; parts are the same for each Menu Item. These are documented below. The &#039;Parameters - Component&#039; part is different for each Internal Link group -- Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, Polls, Search, User, Web Links, and Wrapper. Therefore, these are documented in each group&#039;s section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Parameters - Basic section is different for each Menu Type. Also, some Menu Types contain a Parameters - Advanced section, which is also different for each Menu Type. These are documented for each individual Menu Type above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Alias}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display in}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Parent Item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order (Details)}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Enter Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|On Click, Open in}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters - System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section, shown below, allows setting additional parameters. [[Image:menu_item_parameters_system.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
These are described below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Show Page Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Page Class Suffix}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Image}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|SSL Enabled}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for Articles and Contacts can be set at 3 different levels:&lt;br /&gt;
*# the individual Article or Contact New or Edit screen (Article:[Edit] or Contact:[Edit]).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Menu Item that displays the Article or Contact (this screen).&lt;br /&gt;
*# the Global Configuration screen, accessed using the Parameters button on the Article Manager and Contact Manager screens.&lt;br /&gt;
: The parameter set for the individual Article or Contact always takes first priority. If the individual parameter is set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter set in the Menu Item takes priority. If both of these are set to &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;, then the parameter in the Global Configuration takes priority.&lt;br /&gt;
*Parameters for News Feeds, Search, and Web Links work in a similar way, except that they are only set in this screen and in the Global Configuration screens. No parameters are set for individual items of these types. As with Articles and Contacts, the Menu Item setting takes priority over the Global Configuration setting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the Global Configuration parameters whenever possible. This way, if you want to change a parameter setting for all content items, you can just change it once in the Global Configuration and it will automatically be reflected in all affected content items.&lt;br /&gt;
*Often on the Front Page component, Joomla! users do not want their Articles to display in 2 columns, which is the default value. The first Article displays in one column (using the full width), but subsequent Articles display in 2 columns. This can be adjusted by changing the values of the Parameters - Basic for the Front Page.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are trying to manually change the order of articles on the Front Page or in a Blog or List Layout, make sure that you have the Primary Order and Category Order parameters set correctly in the Parameters - Advanced Section. If these parameters are set incorrectly, changing the order manually will have no effect on the order on the web page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
*{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
*{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[Screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Banners: [[Screen.banners.15|Banner Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Categories: [[Screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Contacts: [[Screen.contactmanager.15|Contact Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To create a &#039;main_menu&#039; Module to Add a Menu to One or More Pages: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with News Feeds: [[Screen.newsfeeds.15|News Feeds Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To work with Polls: [[Screen.polls.15|Polls Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Item Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Menu_Item.Contact.Category_Layout_Params.Basic.png&amp;diff=12811</id>
		<title>File:Menu Item.Contact.Category Layout Params.Basic.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Menu_Item.Contact.Category_Layout_Params.Basic.png&amp;diff=12811"/>
		<updated>2009-01-21T15:43:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Menu Item Contact Category Parameters Basic&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Item Contact Category Parameters Basic&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Menu_Type&amp;diff=12795</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen column header Menu Type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Menu_Type&amp;diff=12795"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T13:09:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;. The type column in the menu manager will actually be the Unique Name of the menu.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.15&amp;diff=12794</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menus.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menus.15&amp;diff=12794"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T13:07:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Screenshot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select Menus &amp;amp;rarr; [name of the menu] from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation. For example, if a Menu is called &amp;quot;Main Menu&amp;quot;, select Menus &amp;amp;rarr; Main Menu. Or you can navigate to the [[screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]] and click on the icon in the Menu Items column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu Item Manager lists the menu items contained in a menu created using the [[screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_Item.Manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Item}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Default}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|ItemID}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menus.toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Menus}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Default}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Move}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Copy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Trash}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Select an item and click on the &#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039; button to set your Home page.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set different filter options to only show some of the menu items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen.menus.edit.15|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Item Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Menu_Item.Manager.png&amp;diff=12793</id>
		<title>File:Menu Item.Manager.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Menu_Item.Manager.png&amp;diff=12793"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T13:06:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Menu Item Manager Overview&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Item Manager Overview&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.new.15&amp;diff=12792</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menumanager.new.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.new.15&amp;diff=12792"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T12:50:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Column Headers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Menu Manager by clicking on the Menu Manager icon in the Control Panel, or by clicking on &#039;Menu Manager&#039; in the &#039;Menus&#039; menu. After that, click on the &#039;New&#039; button in the toolbar, or select a menu and click on the &#039;Edit&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add or modify menus in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu.Manager_New.Edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Unique Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menumanager.new.toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Hover your mouse over the &#039;i&#039; icon next to the input box, and extra information will be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you forgot to create a module for this menu, you can do so by using the [[Screen.modules.15|Module Manager]], found by going to Extensions -&amp;gt; Module Manager. Click on &#039;New&#039;, and then on &#039;Menu&#039;. Fill in a title and select the Menu in the Module Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is a good idea to give a descriptive title for new menus.  This is how the menu will be identified in the &#039;&#039;Backend Menus menu&#039;&#039;. It is also a good idea to fill in the &#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039; field with information about the menu. This is how the menu&#039;s module will be referred to in the Module Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new menu, use only alphanumeric characters without spaces in the &#039;&#039;Unique Name&#039;&#039; field. It is a good idea to use only a-z, 0-9 and underscore (_) characters. Please read the tooltips as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen.cpanel.15|Control Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.new.15&amp;diff=12791</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menumanager.new.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.new.15&amp;diff=12791"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T12:50:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Screenshot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Menu Manager by clicking on the Menu Manager icon in the Control Panel, or by clicking on &#039;Menu Manager&#039; in the &#039;Menus&#039; menu. After that, click on the &#039;New&#039; button in the toolbar, or select a menu and click on the &#039;Edit&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add or modify menus in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu.Manager_New.Edit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Unique Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Description}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Module Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menumanager.new.toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Cancel}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Hover your mouse over the &#039;i&#039; icon next to the input box, and extra information will be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you forgot to create a module for this menu, you can do so by using the [[Screen.modules.15|Module Manager]], found by going to Extensions -&amp;gt; Module Manager. Click on &#039;New&#039;, and then on &#039;Menu&#039;. Fill in a title and select the Menu in the Module Parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is a good idea to give a descriptive title for new menus.  This is how the menu will be identified in the &#039;&#039;Backend Menus menu&#039;&#039;. It is also a good idea to fill in the &#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039; field with information about the menu. This is how the menu&#039;s module will be referred to in the Module Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new menu, use only alphanumeric characters without spaces in the &#039;&#039;Unique Name&#039;&#039; field. It is a good idea to use only a-z, 0-9 and underscore (_) characters. Please read the tooltips as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen.menumanager.15|Menu Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Screen.cpanel.15|Control Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Menu.Manager_New.Edit.png&amp;diff=12790</id>
		<title>File:Menu.Manager New.Edit.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Menu.Manager_New.Edit.png&amp;diff=12790"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T12:49:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Backend Menu Manager - New / Edit&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Backend Menu Manager - New / Edit&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12789</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menumanager.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12789"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T12:18:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Toolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Access==&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend of Joomla! use either &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus -&amp;gt; Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; or the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; from the controlcenter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu Manager controls how Joomla!&#039;s menus will look and act. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current included and published menu items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current number of items that are not published or publicly available.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current number of items that have been deleted, but not purged from the trash manager&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modules Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Menu-manager-toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. To copy a menu (and all included menu items), select the radio button next to it and click the &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot; button. You can than then enter in a new title and module name for the new menu.  The title is what the menu will be referred to as in the Menu Manager.  Module Name is what the menu will be referred to as in the [[Screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. To delete a menu (and all included menu items), select the radio button, and then the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button. You will be given one last chance to change your mind. If you&#039;re sure you want to delete the menu, click the delete button one last time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. The &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button allows you to change the unique name, title, description, and module name for the selected menu.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;. To create a new menu, click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button. You can enter a unique name, a title, description, and the name for the module that will also be created with the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* It is expedient to give a descriptive title for new menus because, later, you will see it in the &#039;&#039;Backend Menus&#039;&#039; menu. It is a good idea to fill in the &#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039; field with information about the menu. If you enter a short title in the &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039; field, you can identify the menu&#039;s  module using that title in the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
* Though you can create a copy of a selected menu by clicking the &#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039; toolbar button, you can make another instance in the Module Manager as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new menu, use only English alphanumeric characters without space in the Unique Name field. It is a good idea using only a-z, 0-9 and underscore (_) characters. Please read the tooltips as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you don&#039;t enter a &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039;, no module will be created and the menu cannot be displayed in the front end. However you can use the Module Manager later to create a new mod_mainmenu module, and assign it to the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you delete an existing menu, do not forget that all the menu items of the respective menu will be also deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Main Menu has your default menu item, so it &#039;&#039;&#039;should not be deleted&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The default menu item is your home page, and your site will not function if it is deleted.  If you change the default menu item, make sure that you don&#039;t delete that menu item either! The menu with the default menu item is marked with an asterisk (*) in the &#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039; menu.  More information can be found at the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Manager page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Items: [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Modules: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12788</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menumanager.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12788"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T12:16:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Toolbar */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Access==&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend of Joomla! use either &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus -&amp;gt; Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; or the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; from the controlcenter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu Manager controls how Joomla!&#039;s menus will look and act. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current included and published menu items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current number of items that are not published or publicly available.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current number of items that have been deleted, but not purged from the trash manager&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modules Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Menu-manager-toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. To copy a menu (and all included menu items), select the radio button next to it and click the &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot; button. You can than then enter in a new title and module name for the new menu.  The title is what the menu will be referred to as in the Menu Manager.  Module Name is what the menu will be referred to as in the [[Screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. To delete a menu, select the radio button, and then the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button. You will be given one last chance to change your mind. If you&#039;re sure you want to delete the menu, click the delete button one last time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. The &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button allows you to change the unique name, title, description, and module name for the selected menu.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;. To create a new menu, click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button. You can enter a unique name, a title, description, and the name for the module that will also be created with the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* It is expedient to give a descriptive title for new menus because, later, you will see it in the &#039;&#039;Backend Menus&#039;&#039; menu. It is a good idea to fill in the &#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039; field with information about the menu. If you enter a short title in the &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039; field, you can identify the menu&#039;s  module using that title in the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
* Though you can create a copy of a selected menu by clicking the &#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039; toolbar button, you can make another instance in the Module Manager as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new menu, use only English alphanumeric characters without space in the Unique Name field. It is a good idea using only a-z, 0-9 and underscore (_) characters. Please read the tooltips as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you don&#039;t enter a &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039;, no module will be created and the menu cannot be displayed in the front end. However you can use the Module Manager later to create a new mod_mainmenu module, and assign it to the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you delete an existing menu, do not forget that all the menu items of the respective menu will be also deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Main Menu has your default menu item, so it &#039;&#039;&#039;should not be deleted&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The default menu item is your home page, and your site will not function if it is deleted.  If you change the default menu item, make sure that you don&#039;t delete that menu item either! The menu with the default menu item is marked with an asterisk (*) in the &#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039; menu.  More information can be found at the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Manager page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Items: [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Modules: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12786</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menumanager.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12786"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T10:33:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Column Headers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Access==&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend of Joomla! use either &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus -&amp;gt; Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; or the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; from the controlcenter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu Manager controls how Joomla!&#039;s menus will look and act. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current included and published menu items.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current number of items that are not published or publicly available.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Amount of the current number of items that have been deleted, but not purged from the trash manager&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modules Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Menu-manager-toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. To copy a menu, select the radio button next to it and click the &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot; button. You can than then enter in a new title and module name for the new menu.  The title is what the menu will be referred to as in the Menu Manager.  Module Name is what the menu will be referred to as in the [[Screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. To delete a menu, select the radio button, and then the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button. You will be given one last chance to change your mind. If you&#039;re sure you want to delete the menu, click the delete button one last time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. The &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button allows you to change the unique name, title, description, and module name for the selected menu.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;. To create a new menu, click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button. You can enter a unique name, a title, description, and the name for the module that will also be created with the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* It is expedient to give a descriptive title for new menus because, later, you will see it in the &#039;&#039;Backend Menus&#039;&#039; menu. It is a good idea to fill in the &#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039; field with information about the menu. If you enter a short title in the &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039; field, you can identify the menu&#039;s  module using that title in the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
* Though you can create a copy of a selected menu by clicking the &#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039; toolbar button, you can make another instance in the Module Manager as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new menu, use only English alphanumeric characters without space in the Unique Name field. It is a good idea using only a-z, 0-9 and underscore (_) characters. Please read the tooltips as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you don&#039;t enter a &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039;, no module will be created and the menu cannot be displayed in the front end. However you can use the Module Manager later to create a new mod_mainmenu module, and assign it to the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you delete an existing menu, do not forget that all the menu items of the respective menu will be also deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Main Menu has your default menu item, so it &#039;&#039;&#039;should not be deleted&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The default menu item is your home page, and your site will not function if it is deleted.  If you change the default menu item, make sure that you don&#039;t delete that menu item either! The menu with the default menu item is marked with an asterisk (*) in the &#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039; menu.  More information can be found at the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Manager page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Items: [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Modules: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12785</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.menumanager.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.menumanager.15&amp;diff=12785"/>
		<updated>2009-01-19T10:20:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Access==&lt;br /&gt;
In the backend of Joomla! use either &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus -&amp;gt; Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; or the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039;&#039; from the controlcenter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Menu Manager controls how Joomla!&#039;s menus will look and act. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Menu_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu Type}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Menu items}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Unpublished}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Trashed}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Modules Column}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Menu-manager-toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. To copy a menu, select the radio button next to it and click the &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot; button. You can than then enter in a new title and module name for the new menu.  The title is what the menu will be referred to as in the Menu Manager.  Module Name is what the menu will be referred to as in the [[Screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. To delete a menu, select the radio button, and then the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button. You will be given one last chance to change your mind. If you&#039;re sure you want to delete the menu, click the delete button one last time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. The &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button allows you to change the unique name, title, description, and module name for the selected menu.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;. To create a new menu, click the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; button. You can enter a unique name, a title, description, and the name for the module that will also be created with the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* It is expedient to give a descriptive title for new menus because, later, you will see it in the &#039;&#039;Backend Menus&#039;&#039; menu. It is a good idea to fill in the &#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039; field with information about the menu. If you enter a short title in the &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039; field, you can identify the menu&#039;s  module using that title in the [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
* Though you can create a copy of a selected menu by clicking the &#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039; toolbar button, you can make another instance in the Module Manager as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you create a new menu, use only English alphanumeric characters without space in the Unique Name field. It is a good idea using only a-z, 0-9 and underscore (_) characters. Please read the tooltips as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you don&#039;t enter a &#039;&#039;Module title&#039;&#039;, no module will be created and the menu cannot be displayed in the front end. However you can use the Module Manager later to create a new mod_mainmenu module, and assign it to the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you delete an existing menu, do not forget that all the menu items of the respective menu will be also deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Main Menu has your default menu item, so it &#039;&#039;&#039;should not be deleted&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The default menu item is your home page, and your site will not function if it is deleted.  If you change the default menu item, make sure that you don&#039;t delete that menu item either! The menu with the default menu item is marked with an asterisk (*) in the &#039;&#039;Menus&#039;&#039; menu.  More information can be found at the [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Manager page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add new Menus: [[Screen.menumanager.new.15|Menu Manager New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Items: [[Screen.menus.15|Menu Item Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Menu Modules: [[screen.modules.15|Module Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Menu Manager|Menus}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Delete&amp;diff=12778</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen toolbar Delete</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Delete&amp;diff=12778"/>
		<updated>2009-01-18T14:09:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039;. To delete one or more items, select them and click this button. The selected items will be deleted. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;only empty items can be deleted.&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Move&amp;diff=12777</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen toolbar Move</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Move&amp;diff=12777"/>
		<updated>2009-01-18T13:48:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move&#039;&#039;&#039;. Select one or more items and click on this button to move them. A new screen will display showing the possible &amp;quot;Move to&amp;quot; locations on the left and the list of item(s) being moved on the right. To complete the move, select the desired &amp;quot;Move to&amp;quot; location and press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button. To cancel the operation, press &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Image&amp;diff=12643</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen toolbar Image</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Image&amp;diff=12643"/>
		<updated>2009-01-13T14:10:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; This button provides an easy way to insert an image into an Article. Images may be inserted from the &#039;images/stories&#039; folder and may also be uploaded. When you click the Image button, a window pops up, as shown below:[[Image:Article_Button.Image_Popup.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Directory.&#039;&#039;&#039; The current directory on the host server. This is the &#039;images/stories&#039; directory under your Joomla! home directory. Use the drop-down list box to select a subdirectory.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Up.&#039;&#039;&#039; Navigate to the parent directory. Note that the top directory for this function is &#039;images/stories&#039;. You can not navigate to a higher directory.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert.&#039;&#039;&#039; Insert the selected image. The insert point will be the current cursor position. You will see the image display inside the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039;. Cancel the operation and close the popup window. You can cancel also in clicking the X at right top corner.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Thumbnail Browse Area.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on an image thumbnail to select the image. Click on a folder icon to navigate to that subdirectory.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Image URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on one of the image thumbnails and the URL for the image will be entered for you.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the desired alignment (left or right) from the drop-down list box. &lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Image Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter a description for the image.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Image Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter a Title for this image. This displays when a User hovers the mouse on the image.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Caption.&#039;&#039;&#039; If checked, image title will display as a caption below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Search...&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this button to browse to an image file to upload from your local computer. A file dialog will open allowing you to select a file.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Start Upload.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once you have selected a file, press this button to upload the file to your Joomla! &#039;images/stories&#039; folder. The thumbnail for the new image will now show in the thumbnail area.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Image&amp;diff=12642</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen toolbar Image</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Image&amp;diff=12642"/>
		<updated>2009-01-13T14:08:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Image.&#039;&#039;&#039; This button provides an easy way to insert an image into an Article. Images may be inserted from the &#039;images/stories&#039; folder and may also be uploaded. When you click the Image button, a window pops up, as shown below:[[Image:Article_Button.Image_Popup.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Directory.&#039;&#039;&#039; The current directory on the host server. This is the &#039;images/stories&#039; directory under your Joomla! home directory. Use the drop-down list box to select a subdirectory.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Up.&#039;&#039;&#039; Navigate to the parent directory. Note that the top directory for this function is &#039;images/stories&#039;. You can not navigate to a higher directory.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert.&#039;&#039;&#039; Insert the selected image. The insert point will be the current cursor position. You will see the image display inside the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039;. Cancel the operation and close the popup window.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Thumbnail Browse Area.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on an image thumbnail to select the image. Click on a folder icon to navigate to that subdirectory.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Image URL.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on one of the image thumbnails and the URL for the image will be entered for you.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Align.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the desired alignment (left or right) from the drop-down list box. &lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Image Description.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter a description for the image.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Image Title.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter a Title for this image. This displays when a User hovers the mouse on the image.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Caption.&#039;&#039;&#039; If checked, image title will display as a caption below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Search...&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this button to browse to an image file to upload from your local computer. A file dialog will open allowing you to select a file.&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;Start Upload.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once you have selected a file, press this button to upload the file to your Joomla! &#039;images/stories&#039; folder. The thumbnail for the new image will now show in the thumbnail area.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Article_Button.Image_Popup.png&amp;diff=12641</id>
		<title>File:Article Button.Image Popup.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Article_Button.Image_Popup.png&amp;diff=12641"/>
		<updated>2009-01-13T14:04:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Article Edit Button Image Popup&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Article Edit Button Image Popup&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Global_Created_Date_and_Time&amp;diff=12623</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen column header Global Created Date and Time</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Global_Created_Date_and_Time&amp;diff=12623"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T18:04:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Created Date and Time.&#039;&#039;&#039; (Hide/Show) Whether or not to display the date and time the Article was created.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Select_Section&amp;diff=12619</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen column header Select Section</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Select_Section&amp;diff=12619"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T15:54:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Section.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the desired Section. Only items in this Section will display. You may also select &#039;Uncategorized&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Select_Category&amp;diff=12618</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen column header Select Category</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Select_Category&amp;diff=12618"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T15:54:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Category.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the desired Category. Only items in this Category will display.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Select_Section&amp;diff=12617</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen column header Select Section</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_column_header_Select_Section&amp;diff=12617"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T15:52:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Section.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the drop-down list box to select the desired Section. Only items in this Section will display.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.content.15&amp;diff=12615</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.content.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.content.15&amp;diff=12615"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T14:55:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Screenshot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Article Manager icon in the [[screen.cpanel.15|Control Panel]], or click &#039;Article Manager&#039; in the &#039;Content&#039; menu in the back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Manager is the place in the back-end where you can add and manage all of the articles for your web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Article.Manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: greyed item (# 15) is archived and cannot be edited before unarchived.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Front Page}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display #}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the following toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:article_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unarchive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Move}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Copy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Trash}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this button to open the Global Configuration window. This window allows you to set default parameters for Articles. This default parameter will take effect if the corresponding Menu Item parameter and Article parameter are both set to &#039;Use Global&#039;. See [[#Global Configuration|Global Configuration]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by entering in part of the title or the ID number. Or you can select a combination of Section, Category, Author, and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Section, Category, Author, Published State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:article_manager_filter2.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
This pop-up screen is shown when the User clicks the &#039;Parameters&#039; button on the Toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:articles_global1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:articles_global2.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Column Headers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Filtering Options (HTML)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you allow others you do not know (and therefore have no reason to trust) to submit articles on your Joomla! Web site, the safest way to do this is to restrict users to Author and turn on Full HTML filtering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web sites can be attacked by users entering in special HTML code. Filtering is a way to protect your Joomla! web site. Joomla! 1.5.2 brings new filtering options to give you more control over the HTML that your content providers submit. You can be as strict or as liberal as you desire, depending on your site&#039;s needs. The filtering is opt-in meaning you must select an option if you wish to enable filters.  You must define the maximum user group that will receive additional filtering, and then control the type and extent of that filtering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default filtering is modified by entering in the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
 	&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Groups.&#039;&#039;&#039; This sets the user groups that you want additional filters applied to. Other groups will have no additional filtering done. By default, all groups have filtering to protect against markup commonly associated with web site attacks.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; Black List (Default), White List, No HTML. &lt;br /&gt;
**Black list means allow all HTML tags and attributes &#039;&#039;except&#039;&#039; those listed. &lt;br /&gt;
**White list means allow &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; the listed tags and attributes. &lt;br /&gt;
**No HTML means allow no HTML markup at all. All HTML is removed from an Article when it is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Tags.&#039;&#039;&#039; The &#039;&#039;extra&#039;&#039; tags to exclude in a Black List, or the &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; tags to allow in a White List.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Attributes.&#039;&#039;&#039; The &#039;&#039;extra&#039;&#039; tag attributes to exclude in a Black List, or the &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; tag attributes to allow in a White List.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
The default filter method in Joomla! is &#039;Black List&#039;. The default &#039;Black List&#039; contains the following tags to exclude:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;applet&#039;, &#039;body&#039;, &#039;bgsound&#039;, &#039;base&#039;, &#039;basefont&#039;, &#039;embed&#039;, &#039;frame&#039;, &#039;frameset&#039;, &#039;head&#039;, &#039;html&#039;, &#039;id&#039;, &#039;iframe&#039;, &#039;ilayer&#039;, &#039;layer&#039;, &#039;link&#039;, &#039;meta&#039;, &#039;name&#039;, &#039;object&#039;, &#039;script&#039;, &#039;style&#039;, &#039;title&#039;, &#039;xml&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default &#039;Black List&#039; contains the following attributes to exclude:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;action&#039;, &#039;background&#039;, &#039;codebase&#039;, &#039;dynsrc&#039;, &#039;lowsrc&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;Black List&#039; (disallow) additional tags and attributes by adding to the Filter tags and Filter attributes fields, separating each tag or attribute name with a space or comma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that these settings work regardless of the editor that you are using.  Even if you are using a WYSIWYG editor, the filtering settings may strip additional tags and attributes prior to saving information in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter Example====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, to allow people in your Author group to only submit content with basic HTML tags, use the following settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Filter groups box, select Registered and Author.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select White List as the Filter type&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the Filter tags to: p, b, i, em, br, a, ul, ol, li, img&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the Filter attributes to: href, target, src&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Developers Notes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filtering parameters in config.xml have the new parameter menu=&amp;quot;hide&amp;quot;.  This hides the filters from the Menu Item&#039;s Component pane as you do not want cascading overrides to occur at the menu item level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*In Joomla! versions prior to 1.5, there were separate processes for creating a Static Content Item and normal Content Items. Both processes are now done just by adding Articles. Normal Content Items are now just called Articles, and Static Content Items are now called Uncategorized Articles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a static content item, create a new Article in the same way as for normal content and assign it to the &#039;Uncategorized&#039; Section and Category. You can then use the Menu Item Type called Article Layout to show the Article in a page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Joomla! 1.5 changes the method you must use to create the &#039;Read more...&#039; link. When you are adding or editing an article, just press the &#039;Read more...&#039; button located at the bottom of the screen, next to Image and Pagebreak buttons. This inserts a &#039;Read more...&#039; break in the Article. The text before the break will display as the Intro Text, and the text after the break will display when the &#039;Read more...&#039; link is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Categories: [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Sections: [[screen.sections.15|Section Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Users: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Article Manager|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.content.15&amp;diff=12614</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.content.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.content.15&amp;diff=12614"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T14:53:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Screenshot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Article Manager icon in the [[screen.cpanel.15|Control Panel]], or click &#039;Article Manager&#039; in the &#039;Content&#039; menu in the back-end of your Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Article Manager is the place in the back-end where you can add and manage all of the articles for your web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Article.Manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column&#039;s value.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Checkbox}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Article Published}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Front Page}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Order}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Access Level}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Date}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Id}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display #}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the following toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:article_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are:&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unarchive}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Archive}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Publish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Unpublish}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Move}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Copy}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Trash}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Edit}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|New}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parameters.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click this button to open the Global Configuration window. This window allows you to set default parameters for Articles. This default parameter will take effect if the corresponding Menu Item parameter and Article parameter are both set to &#039;Use Global&#039;. See [[#Global Configuration|Global Configuration]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List Filters==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Partial Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can filter the list of items either by entering in part of the title or the ID number. Or you can select a combination of Section, Category, Author, and Published State.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|List Filter}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter by Section, Category, Author, Published State&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right area, above the column headings, are 4 drop-down list boxes as shown below:[[Image:article_manager_filter2.png|center]] The selections may be combined. Only items matching all selections will display in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Section}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Category}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select Author}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Select State}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Global Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
This pop-up screen is shown when the User clicks the &#039;Parameters&#039; button on the Toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:articles_global1.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:articles_global2.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Column Headers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Unauthorized Links}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Article Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Intro Text}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Section Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Section Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Category Title}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Category Title Linkable}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Author Name}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Created Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Modified Date and Time}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Show Navigation}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Read more... Link}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Article Rating/Voting}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Icons}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global PDF Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global Print Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global E-mail Icon}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Hits}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Global For each feed item show}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Filtering Options (HTML)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you allow others you do not know (and therefore have no reason to trust) to submit articles on your Joomla! Web site, the safest way to do this is to restrict users to Author and turn on Full HTML filtering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web sites can be attacked by users entering in special HTML code. Filtering is a way to protect your Joomla! web site. Joomla! 1.5.2 brings new filtering options to give you more control over the HTML that your content providers submit. You can be as strict or as liberal as you desire, depending on your site&#039;s needs. The filtering is opt-in meaning you must select an option if you wish to enable filters.  You must define the maximum user group that will receive additional filtering, and then control the type and extent of that filtering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default filtering is modified by entering in the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
 	&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Groups.&#039;&#039;&#039; This sets the user groups that you want additional filters applied to. Other groups will have no additional filtering done. By default, all groups have filtering to protect against markup commonly associated with web site attacks.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Type.&#039;&#039;&#039; Black List (Default), White List, No HTML. &lt;br /&gt;
**Black list means allow all HTML tags and attributes &#039;&#039;except&#039;&#039; those listed. &lt;br /&gt;
**White list means allow &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; the listed tags and attributes. &lt;br /&gt;
**No HTML means allow no HTML markup at all. All HTML is removed from an Article when it is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Tags.&#039;&#039;&#039; The &#039;&#039;extra&#039;&#039; tags to exclude in a Black List, or the &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; tags to allow in a White List.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Attributes.&#039;&#039;&#039; The &#039;&#039;extra&#039;&#039; tag attributes to exclude in a Black List, or the &#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039; tag attributes to allow in a White List.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default Filters====&lt;br /&gt;
The default filter method in Joomla! is &#039;Black List&#039;. The default &#039;Black List&#039; contains the following tags to exclude:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;applet&#039;, &#039;body&#039;, &#039;bgsound&#039;, &#039;base&#039;, &#039;basefont&#039;, &#039;embed&#039;, &#039;frame&#039;, &#039;frameset&#039;, &#039;head&#039;, &#039;html&#039;, &#039;id&#039;, &#039;iframe&#039;, &#039;ilayer&#039;, &#039;layer&#039;, &#039;link&#039;, &#039;meta&#039;, &#039;name&#039;, &#039;object&#039;, &#039;script&#039;, &#039;style&#039;, &#039;title&#039;, &#039;xml&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default &#039;Black List&#039; contains the following attributes to exclude:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;action&#039;, &#039;background&#039;, &#039;codebase&#039;, &#039;dynsrc&#039;, &#039;lowsrc&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can &#039;Black List&#039; (disallow) additional tags and attributes by adding to the Filter tags and Filter attributes fields, separating each tag or attribute name with a space or comma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that these settings work regardless of the editor that you are using.  Even if you are using a WYSIWYG editor, the filtering settings may strip additional tags and attributes prior to saving information in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Filter Example====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, to allow people in your Author group to only submit content with basic HTML tags, use the following settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Filter groups box, select Registered and Author.&lt;br /&gt;
* Select White List as the Filter type&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the Filter tags to: p, b, i, em, br, a, ul, ol, li, img&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the Filter attributes to: href, target, src&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Developers Notes====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filtering parameters in config.xml have the new parameter menu=&amp;quot;hide&amp;quot;.  This hides the filters from the Menu Item&#039;s Component pane as you do not want cascading overrides to occur at the menu item level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*In Joomla! versions prior to 1.5, there were separate processes for creating a Static Content Item and normal Content Items. Both processes are now done just by adding Articles. Normal Content Items are now just called Articles, and Static Content Items are now called Uncategorized Articles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a static content item, create a new Article in the same way as for normal content and assign it to the &#039;Uncategorized&#039; Section and Category. You can then use the Menu Item Type called Article Layout to show the Article in a page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Joomla! 1.5 changes the method you must use to create the &#039;Read more...&#039; link. When you are adding or editing an article, just press the &#039;Read more...&#039; button located at the bottom of the screen, next to Image and Pagebreak buttons. This inserts a &#039;Read more...&#039; break in the Article. The text before the break will display as the Intro Text, and the text after the break will display when the &#039;Read more...&#039; link is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* To add or edit Articles: [[screen.content.edit.15|Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Categories: [[screen.categories.15|Category Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Sections: [[screen.sections.15|Section Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
* To manage Users: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Article Manager|Content}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Article.Manager.png&amp;diff=12613</id>
		<title>File:Article.Manager.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Article.Manager.png&amp;diff=12613"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T14:52:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Backend Article Management&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Backend Article Management&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12611</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.languages.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12611"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T12:00:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* How to Access */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Language Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; click the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; in the control center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Language Manager you can set the default Language for both the Front-end and Back-end of your Joomla! web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Both the &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Administrator&#039;&#039; tabs have the following column titles. These details are fetched from the XML file included in the language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this radio button to select the Language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The names of the installed Languages on this web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default language of the site, marked with a yellow graphical asterisk in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the installed language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The creation date of the language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the language translator is displayed in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The e-mail address of the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Language that you want to be the default Language. Then click this button. The default star symbol will show in the Default column, indicating that this is now the default Language.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site and Administrator Links==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the columns, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Template_manager_links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Front-end of the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Back-end of the web site. Note that the languages for the Front and Back end can be different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can use any Language from the list of installed Languages, either by having it assigned in the [[screen.users.15|User Manager]] or by filling out a [[Screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]] at the Front end. This will cause the Joomla! system prompts to be generated in this Language just for this User. For example, if a User chooses Spanish as their language, then the Search Module will show with prompts in Spanish, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Spanish_language_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*This User&#039;s choice is not affected by the Default Language set for the Front-end.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Changing a User&#039;s Language or the Default Language does not affect the web site&#039;s Articles and other content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do not delete the default language files (for example, with FTP). This will create errors on both the Front-end and Back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional Languages can be added using the [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If desired, you can show the Front-end site in one Language and show the Back-end administration pages in a different Language. Also, individual articles can be configured to use a different language in the Advanced Parameter pane when editing the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install more Languages: [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall a Language: [[screen.installer.15#Languages Screen|Extension Manager - Languages screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Language for a User: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a form that allows a User to set their own Language: [[screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To set the Language of an Article: [[screen.content.edit.15#Parameters - Advanced|Article Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Advanced&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Language Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12610</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.languages.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.languages.15&amp;diff=12610"/>
		<updated>2009-01-12T11:45:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* How to Access */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to Access==&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Extensions &amp;amp;rarr; Language Manager&#039;&#039;&#039; from the drop-down menu on the back-end of your Joomla! installation or click the icon &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; in the control center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
In the Language Manager you can set the default Language for both the Front-end and Back-end of your Joomla! web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Screenshot==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_manager.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Column Headers==&lt;br /&gt;
Both the &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Administrator&#039;&#039; tabs have the following column titles. These details are fetched from the XML file included in the language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Number}}&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Checkbox.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check this radio button to select the Language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Language Name.&#039;&#039;&#039; The names of the installed Languages on this web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default language of the site, marked with a yellow graphical asterisk in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version.&#039;&#039;&#039; The version number of the installed language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Date.&#039;&#039;&#039; The creation date of the language.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author.&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the language translator is displayed in this column.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Author E-mail.&#039;&#039;&#039; The e-mail address of the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
{{colheader|Display}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_manager_toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the Language that you want to be the default Language. Then click this button. The default star symbol will show in the Default column, indicating that this is now the default Language.&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site and Administrator Links==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top left, above the columns, you will see two links as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Template_manager_links.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Site.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Front-end of the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator.&#039;&#039;&#039; Shows the Languages available for the Back-end of the web site. Note that the languages for the Front and Back end can be different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
*Users can use any Language from the list of installed Languages, either by having it assigned in the [[screen.users.15|User Manager]] or by filling out a [[Screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]] at the Front end. This will cause the Joomla! system prompts to be generated in this Language just for this User. For example, if a User chooses Spanish as their language, then the Search Module will show with prompts in Spanish, as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Spanish_language_example.png|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*This User&#039;s choice is not affected by the Default Language set for the Front-end.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Changing a User&#039;s Language or the Default Language does not affect the web site&#039;s Articles and other content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: Do not delete the default language files (for example, with FTP). This will create errors on both the Front-end and Back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Additional Languages can be added using the [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If desired, you can show the Front-end site in one Language and show the Back-end administration pages in a different Language. Also, individual articles can be configured to use a different language in the Advanced Parameter pane when editing the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
*To install more Languages: [[screen.installer.15#Install Screen|Extension Manager - Install Screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To uninstall a Language: [[screen.installer.15#Languages Screen|Extension Manager - Languages screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To change the Language for a User: [[screen.users.15|User Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a form that allows a User to set their own Language: [[screen.menus.edit.15#User Form Layout|Menu Item Manager - New/Edit - User Form Layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
*To set the Language of an Article: [[screen.content.edit.15#Parameters - Advanced|Article Manager - New/Edit - Parameters - Advanced&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Language Manager|Extensions}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Edit&amp;diff=12588</id>
		<title>Chunk:Help screen toolbar Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Chunk:Help_screen_toolbar_Edit&amp;diff=12588"/>
		<updated>2009-01-11T17:57:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;. Select one item and click on this button to open it in edit mode. If you have more than one item selected (where applicable), the first item will be opened. You can also open an item for editing by clicking on its Title or Name.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.config.15&amp;diff=12584</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.config.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.config.15&amp;diff=12584"/>
		<updated>2009-01-11T15:16:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Server Settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
To access the page, either click on &#039;&#039;Global Configuration&#039;&#039; in the main [[screen.cpanel.15|Control panel]] or go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Site &amp;gt; Global Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Global Configuration screen allows you to configure the Joomla! site with your personal settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site==&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Global.Config_Site.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
====Site Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Site Offline&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting shows when the site is offline.  Only Administrators will be able to see the site when &#039;&#039;Site Offline&#039;&#039; is set to Yes.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Offline Message&#039;&#039;&#039;. The message that will be displayed on the site when the site is offline.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Site Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the site.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default WYSIWYG Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;. (WYSIWYG stands for What You See Is What You Get) The default [[Content creators#Content_Editors|editor]] to use when creating articles.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;List Length&#039;&#039;&#039;. The length of lists in the Control Panel for all Users.  By default, this is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;20&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Feed Length&#039;&#039;&#039;. The number of content items to be shown in the feed(s).  By default, this is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Metadata Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Global Site Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the description of the site which is indexed by search engine spiders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Global Site Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039;. These keywords describe the site and are the basis for improving the ability of search engine spiders ability to index the site.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title Meta Tag&#039;&#039;&#039;. It shows the Meta information of each article.  This Meta information is used by search engine spiders when indexing the site.  Each article can have its own Meta Data information (set under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata Information&#039;&#039;&#039; pane when creating or editing an article).  &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author Meta Tag&#039;&#039;&#039;. It shows the Author Meta information for articles and is used by search engine spiders when indexing the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====SEO Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
SEO stands for &#039;&#039;Search Engine Optimization&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Search Engine Friendly URLs&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, URLs are rewritten to be more friendly for search engine spiders. For example, the URL: &#039;&#039;www.example.com/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=etc...&#039;&#039;, would turn into: &#039;&#039;www.example.com/alias&#039;&#039;.  Most of the items created in Joomla! have an Alias box where a search engine friendly URL can be inserted.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use Apache &#039;&#039;mod_rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, Joomla! will use the &#039;&#039;mod_rewrite&#039;&#039; settings of Apache when creating search engine friendly URLs.  Please note: it is advised that you do not modify any &#039;&#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039;&#039; file without an understanding of how it works. You must use the &#039;&#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039;&#039; file provided with Joomla! in order to use this setting.  To use this file, rename the &#039;&#039;&#039;htaccess.txt&#039;&#039;&#039; file (found in the root directory) to &#039;&#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039;&#039;. By default, this setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add suffix to URLs&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, Joomla! will add &#039;&#039;&#039;.html&#039;&#039;&#039; to the end of the URLs.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System==&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Global.Config_System.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
====System Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secret Word&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is generated when Joomla! is first installed and is not changeable.  It is used internally by Joomla! for security purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Log folder&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where the logs should be stored.  The Joomla! installer should automatically fill in this folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Web Services&#039;&#039;&#039;. This feature enables Joomla! to make RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) using HTTP as the transport medium and XML as the encoding language.  This function should remain on to ensure that many third party extensions works.  The default setting &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Help Server&#039;&#039;&#039;. The place Joomla! looks for help information when you click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039; button (visible in many screens and options of the administration panel).  By default, it uses Joomla!&#039;s main help site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow User Registration&#039;&#039;&#039;. This determines whether users can register on the site.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;New User Registration Type&#039;&#039;&#039;. If &#039;&#039;Allow User Registration&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, this setting tells Joomla! what level of access should be given to new users who register.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;New User Account Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting determines whether a new user will have to activate their account before they can use it.  If set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, users will be sent an email containing a link to a web address.  The user must follow this link to activate his/her account.  By default, this setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Front-end User Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Show&#039;&#039;, users will be able to select their language, article editor, and help site preferences from within their Details screen.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Show&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Media Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Legal Extensions (File Types)&#039;&#039;&#039;. These are the file types users are allowed to upload.  By default, when Joomla! is installed, basic image and document files are allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum Size (in bytes)&#039;&#039;&#039;. The maximum file size users are allowed to upload, in bytes. The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;10000000&#039;&#039;&#039; (or 10mb).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Media Folder&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where non-image media files are located, including videos and document files. The default is &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Joomla! home&amp;gt;/images&amp;quot;. You can create a new folder to use with the Media Manager and enter the path to that folder here. &#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Do not delete or rename the existing &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Joomla! home&amp;gt;/images&amp;quot; folder on your server.&#039;&#039; This folder and its subfolders &amp;quot;images/banners&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;images/M_images&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;images/smiles&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; are used by Joomla!. Deleting or renaming these folders may cause errors. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Image Folder&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The path where images are stored.  The default is &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Joomla! home&amp;gt;/images/stories&amp;quot;. You can create a new folder to use with the Media Manager and enter the path to that folder here. If you want to access this folder from the Media Manager, either use the default value or make the new folder a sub-folder of the Media Manager folder. &#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Do not delete or rename the existing &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder on your server.&#039;&#039; This folder is used by Joomla! and deleting or renaming it will cause errors.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Restrict Uploads&#039;&#039;&#039;. This feature restricts uploads by user type.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Check MIME Types&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses MIME Magic or Fileinfo to verify files.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.  By checking the MIME information, you help ensure users don&#039;t upload malicious files to your site.  If invalid MIME type errors are received then change the setting to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Legal Image Extensions (File Types)&#039;&#039;&#039;. This allows you to limit the types of images that can be uploaded. It operates by checking the file image headers.  By default, Joomla! only allows &#039;&#039;&#039;bmp,gif,jpg,png&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ignored Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets which extensions are ignored for MIME type checking and restricts uploads.  By default, no extensions are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Legal MIME Types&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets the list of legal MIME types for uploads.  By default, Joomla! automatically includes some standard file types.  It is recommended that you do not touch this setting unless you know what you are doing.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Illegal MIME Types&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets the list of illegal MIME types for uploads.  By default, Joomla! automatically blocks HTML MIME types.  It is recommended that you do not touch this setting unless you know what you are doing.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Flash Uploader&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting anables the integrated Flash Uploader which is used for example at the Media Management. If enabled it is possible to upload several fieles at once. Default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip&#039;&#039;&#039;: if enabled and the download does not work, disable the flash uploader (can happen due incompatible flash settings by Adobe)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Debug Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Debug System&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will turn on the debugging system of Joomla!.  When set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, this tool will provide diagnostic information, language translations, and SQL errors. If any such issues or errors occur, they will be displayed at the bottom of each page, in both the front-end and back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Debug Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will turn on the debugging indicators (*...*) or (?...?) for the Joomla! Language files.  Debug Language will work without the Debug System tool set to on.  But it will not provide additional detailed references which would help in correcting any errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Cache Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets whether site caching is enabled or not.  When enabled, it keeps a local copy of the content on the server to speed up accessing and lessen stress on the database.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache Time&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets the maximum length of time (in minutes) for a cache file to be stored before it is refreshed.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;15&#039;&#039;&#039; minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache Handler&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets how the cache operates.  There is only one caching mechanism which is file-based.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Session Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Session Lifetime&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets how long a session should last and how long a user can remain signed in for (before logging them off for being inactive).  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;15&#039;&#039;&#039; minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Session Handler&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets how the session should be handled once a user connects and logs into the site.  The default setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Database&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Server==&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Global.Config_Server.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
====Server Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Temp-folder&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where files are temporarily stored.  This is filled in by default when Joomla! is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;GZIP Page Compression&#039;&#039;&#039;. Compressing pages typically increases your site&#039;s speed.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Error Reporting&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets the appropriate level of reporting.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;System Default&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Force SSL&#039;&#039;. This setting forces the site access for selected areas under SSL (https). &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: you must have set already the server to use SSL. Options are:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;. SSL is not activated&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Administrator Only&#039;&#039;&#039;. SSL is only valid for the backend.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Entire Site&#039;&#039;&#039;. SSL is valid for the whole site (front- &amp;amp; backend).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Locale Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;. This tool sets the current date and time.  The set time should be where the site&#039;s server is located.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;(UTC 00:00) Western Europe Time, London, Lisbon, Casablanca&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====FTP Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol.  Most of these settings are set during the initial Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable FTP&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting tells Joomla! to use it&#039;s built-in FTP function instead of the normal upload process used by PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Host&#039;&#039;&#039;. The host server&#039;s URL connecting the FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Port&#039;&#039;&#039;. The port where the FTP is accessed.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;21&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username that Joomla! will use when accessing the FTP server.  Security recommendation: create another FTP user account to access a folder where files will be uploaded to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. The password that Joomla! will use when accessing the FTP server.  Security recommendation: create another FTP user account to access the folder where files will be uploaded to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Root&#039;&#039;&#039;. The root directory where files should be uploaded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Database Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are set during the initial setup of Joomla!  It is advised to leave these settings the way they are, unless you have a good understanding of how databases work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Database Type&#039;&#039;&#039;. The type of databased to be used.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;mysql&#039;&#039;&#039;, but this can be changed during the initial setup of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Hostname&#039;&#039;&#039;. The hostname where the database is located.  It is typically set to &#039;&#039;&#039;localhost&#039;&#039;&#039; for most servers.  It is possible for the hostname to be located on a different server all together.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username to access the database.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Database&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the database.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Database Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;. The prefix used before the actual table&#039;s name.  This allows you to have multiple Joomla! installations in the same database.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;jos_&#039;&#039;&#039;, but this can be changed during initial setup of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Mail Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
The mail settings are set during the initial setup of Joomla!.  These settings can be changed whenever needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets which mailer to use to deliver emails from the site.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;PHP Mail Function&#039;&#039;&#039;. This can be changed during the initial setup of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;PHP Mail Function&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses the mail function that is built into PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses the Sendmail program, which is typically used when creating HTML email forms.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses the site&#039;s SMTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mail from&#039;&#039;&#039;. The email address used by Joomla! to send site email.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;From Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name Joomla! will use when sending site emails.  By default, Joomla! uses the site name during the initial setup.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail Path&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where the Sendmail program is located.  This is typically filled in by Joomla! during the initial setup.  This path is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;. If the SMTP server requires authentication to send mail, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;. Otherwise leave it at &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username to use for access to the SMTP host.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. The password to use for access to the SMTP host.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Host&#039;&#039;&#039;. The SMTP address to use when sending mail.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Config.toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save config}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most, if not all, of these settings can be set once and then left alone.&lt;br /&gt;
* If major modifications need to be made, then consider taking the site offline to test it and to make sure everything is in working order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The settings are saved in &#039;&amp;lt;Joomla! root&amp;gt;/configuration.php&#039;. You have to either activate the FTP-layer or make the &#039;configuration.php&#039; file writable to save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[screen.cpanel.15|Control panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[screen.content.edit.15 | Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/howto/htaccess.html Info about .htaccess]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Global Configuration|Site}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.config.15&amp;diff=12583</id>
		<title>Help15:Screen.config.15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Help15:Screen.config.15&amp;diff=12583"/>
		<updated>2009-01-11T15:05:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: /* Screenshot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to access==&lt;br /&gt;
To access the page, either click on &#039;&#039;Global Configuration&#039;&#039; in the main [[screen.cpanel.15|Control panel]] or go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Site &amp;gt; Global Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
The Global Configuration screen allows you to configure the Joomla! site with your personal settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site==&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Global.Config_Site.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
====Site Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Site Offline&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting shows when the site is offline.  Only Administrators will be able to see the site when &#039;&#039;Site Offline&#039;&#039; is set to Yes.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Offline Message&#039;&#039;&#039;. The message that will be displayed on the site when the site is offline.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Site Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the site.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default WYSIWYG Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;. (WYSIWYG stands for What You See Is What You Get) The default [[Content creators#Content_Editors|editor]] to use when creating articles.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;List Length&#039;&#039;&#039;. The length of lists in the Control Panel for all Users.  By default, this is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;20&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Feed Length&#039;&#039;&#039;. The number of content items to be shown in the feed(s).  By default, this is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Metadata Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Global Site Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the description of the site which is indexed by search engine spiders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Global Site Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039;. These keywords describe the site and are the basis for improving the ability of search engine spiders ability to index the site.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title Meta Tag&#039;&#039;&#039;. It shows the Meta information of each article.  This Meta information is used by search engine spiders when indexing the site.  Each article can have its own Meta Data information (set under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata Information&#039;&#039;&#039; pane when creating or editing an article).  &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author Meta Tag&#039;&#039;&#039;. It shows the Author Meta information for articles and is used by search engine spiders when indexing the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====SEO Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
SEO stands for &#039;&#039;Search Engine Optimization&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Search Engine Friendly URLs&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, URLs are rewritten to be more friendly for search engine spiders. For example, the URL: &#039;&#039;www.example.com/index.php?option=com_content&amp;amp;view=etc...&#039;&#039;, would turn into: &#039;&#039;www.example.com/alias&#039;&#039;.  Most of the items created in Joomla! have an Alias box where a search engine friendly URL can be inserted.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use Apache &#039;&#039;mod_rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, Joomla! will use the &#039;&#039;mod_rewrite&#039;&#039; settings of Apache when creating search engine friendly URLs.  Please note: it is advised that you do not modify any &#039;&#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039;&#039; file without an understanding of how it works. You must use the &#039;&#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039;&#039; file provided with Joomla! in order to use this setting.  To use this file, rename the &#039;&#039;&#039;htaccess.txt&#039;&#039;&#039; file (found in the root directory) to &#039;&#039;&#039;.htaccess&#039;&#039;&#039;. By default, this setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add suffix to URLs&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, Joomla! will add &#039;&#039;&#039;.html&#039;&#039;&#039; to the end of the URLs.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System==&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Global.Config_System.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
====System Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secret Word&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is generated when Joomla! is first installed and is not changeable.  It is used internally by Joomla! for security purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Log folder&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where the logs should be stored.  The Joomla! installer should automatically fill in this folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Web Services&#039;&#039;&#039;. This feature enables Joomla! to make RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) using HTTP as the transport medium and XML as the encoding language.  This function should remain on to ensure that many third party extensions works.  The default setting &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Help Server&#039;&#039;&#039;. The place Joomla! looks for help information when you click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039; button (visible in many screens and options of the administration panel).  By default, it uses Joomla!&#039;s main help site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow User Registration&#039;&#039;&#039;. This determines whether users can register on the site.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;New User Registration Type&#039;&#039;&#039;. If &#039;&#039;Allow User Registration&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;, this setting tells Joomla! what level of access should be given to new users who register.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;New User Account Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting determines whether a new user will have to activate their account before they can use it.  If set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, users will be sent an email containing a link to a web address.  The user must follow this link to activate his/her account.  By default, this setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Front-end User Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;. When set to &#039;&#039;Show&#039;&#039;, users will be able to select their language, article editor, and help site preferences from within their Details screen.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Show&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Media Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Legal Extensions (File Types)&#039;&#039;&#039;. These are the file types users are allowed to upload.  By default, when Joomla! is installed, basic image and document files are allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum Size (in bytes)&#039;&#039;&#039;. The maximum file size users are allowed to upload, in bytes. The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;10000000&#039;&#039;&#039; (or 10mb).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Media Folder&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where non-image media files are located, including videos and document files. The default is &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Joomla! home&amp;gt;/images&amp;quot;. You can create a new folder to use with the Media Manager and enter the path to that folder here. &#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Do not delete or rename the existing &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Joomla! home&amp;gt;/images&amp;quot; folder on your server.&#039;&#039; This folder and its subfolders &amp;quot;images/banners&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;images/M_images&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;images/smiles&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; are used by Joomla!. Deleting or renaming these folders may cause errors. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Image Folder&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The path where images are stored.  The default is &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Joomla! home&amp;gt;/images/stories&amp;quot;. You can create a new folder to use with the Media Manager and enter the path to that folder here. If you want to access this folder from the Media Manager, either use the default value or make the new folder a sub-folder of the Media Manager folder. &#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;Do not delete or rename the existing &amp;quot;images/stories&amp;quot; folder on your server.&#039;&#039; This folder is used by Joomla! and deleting or renaming it will cause errors.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Restrict Uploads&#039;&#039;&#039;. This feature restricts uploads by user type.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Check MIME Types&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses MIME Magic or Fileinfo to verify files.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;.  By checking the MIME information, you help ensure users don&#039;t upload malicious files to your site.  If invalid MIME type errors are received then change the setting to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Legal Image Extensions (File Types)&#039;&#039;&#039;. This allows you to limit the types of images that can be uploaded. It operates by checking the file image headers.  By default, Joomla! only allows &#039;&#039;&#039;bmp,gif,jpg,png&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ignored Extensions&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets which extensions are ignored for MIME type checking and restricts uploads.  By default, no extensions are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Legal MIME Types&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets the list of legal MIME types for uploads.  By default, Joomla! automatically includes some standard file types.  It is recommended that you do not touch this setting unless you know what you are doing.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Illegal MIME Types&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets the list of illegal MIME types for uploads.  By default, Joomla! automatically blocks HTML MIME types.  It is recommended that you do not touch this setting unless you know what you are doing.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Flash Uploader&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting anables the integrated Flash Uploader which is used for example at the Media Management. If enabled it is possible to upload several fieles at once. Default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip&#039;&#039;&#039;: if enabled and the download does not work, disable the flash uploader (can happen due incompatible flash settings by Adobe)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Debug Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Debug System&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will turn on the debugging system of Joomla!.  When set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, this tool will provide diagnostic information, language translations, and SQL errors. If any such issues or errors occur, they will be displayed at the bottom of each page, in both the front-end and back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Debug Language&#039;&#039;&#039;. This will turn on the debugging indicators (*...*) or (?...?) for the Joomla! Language files.  Debug Language will work without the Debug System tool set to on.  But it will not provide additional detailed references which would help in correcting any errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Cache Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets whether site caching is enabled or not.  When enabled, it keeps a local copy of the content on the server to speed up accessing and lessen stress on the database.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache Time&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets the maximum length of time (in minutes) for a cache file to be stored before it is refreshed.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;15&#039;&#039;&#039; minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cache Handler&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets how the cache operates.  There is only one caching mechanism which is file-based.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Session Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Session Lifetime&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets how long a session should last and how long a user can remain signed in for (before logging them off for being inactive).  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;15&#039;&#039;&#039; minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Session Handler&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets how the session should be handled once a user connects and logs into the site.  The default setting is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Database&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Server==&lt;br /&gt;
===Screenshot===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Global.Config_Server.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
====Server Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Path to Temp-folder&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where files are temporarily stored.  This is filled in by default when Joomla! is installed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;GZIP Page Compression&#039;&#039;&#039;. Compressing pages typically increases your site&#039;s speed.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Error Reporting&#039;&#039;&#039;. This sets the appropriate level of reporting.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;System Default&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Force SSL&#039;&#039;. This setting forces the site access for selected areas under SSL (https). &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: you must have set already the server to use SSL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Locale Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;. This tool sets the current date and time.  The set time should be where the site&#039;s server is located.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;(UTC 00:00) Western Europe Time, London, Lisbon, Casablanca&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====FTP Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol.  Most of these settings are set during the initial Joomla! installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable FTP&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting tells Joomla! to use it&#039;s built-in FTP function instead of the normal upload process used by PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Host&#039;&#039;&#039;. The host server&#039;s URL connecting the FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Port&#039;&#039;&#039;. The port where the FTP is accessed.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;21&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username that Joomla! will use when accessing the FTP server.  Security recommendation: create another FTP user account to access a folder where files will be uploaded to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. The password that Joomla! will use when accessing the FTP server.  Security recommendation: create another FTP user account to access the folder where files will be uploaded to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FTP Root&#039;&#039;&#039;. The root directory where files should be uploaded to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Database Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are set during the initial setup of Joomla!  It is advised to leave these settings the way they are, unless you have a good understanding of how databases work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Database Type&#039;&#039;&#039;. The type of databased to be used.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;mysql&#039;&#039;&#039;, but this can be changed during the initial setup of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Hostname&#039;&#039;&#039;. The hostname where the database is located.  It is typically set to &#039;&#039;&#039;localhost&#039;&#039;&#039; for most servers.  It is possible for the hostname to be located on a different server all together.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username to access the database.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Database&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the database.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Database Prefix&#039;&#039;&#039;. The prefix used before the actual table&#039;s name.  This allows you to have multiple Joomla! installations in the same database.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;jos_&#039;&#039;&#039;, but this can be changed during initial setup of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Mail Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
The mail settings are set during the initial setup of Joomla!.  These settings can be changed whenever needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039;. This setting sets which mailer to use to deliver emails from the site.  The default setting is &#039;&#039;&#039;PHP Mail Function&#039;&#039;&#039;. This can be changed during the initial setup of Joomla!.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;PHP Mail Function&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses the mail function that is built into PHP.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses the Sendmail program, which is typically used when creating HTML email forms.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;. This uses the site&#039;s SMTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mail from&#039;&#039;&#039;. The email address used by Joomla! to send site email.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;From Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name Joomla! will use when sending site emails.  By default, Joomla! uses the site name during the initial setup.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail Path&#039;&#039;&#039;. The path where the Sendmail program is located.  This is typically filled in by Joomla! during the initial setup.  This path is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;. If the SMTP server requires authentication to send mail, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;. Otherwise leave it at &#039;&#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;&#039;.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Username&#039;&#039;&#039;. The username to use for access to the SMTP host.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Password&#039;&#039;&#039;. The password to use for access to the SMTP host.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SMTP Host&#039;&#039;&#039;. The SMTP address to use when sending mail.  This is only used if &#039;&#039;&#039;Mailer&#039;&#039;&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;Sendmail&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top right you will see the toolbar: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Config.toolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions are: &lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Save config}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Apply}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Close}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{toolbaricon|Help}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quick Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Most, if not all, of these settings can be set once and then left alone.&lt;br /&gt;
* If major modifications need to be made, then consider taking the site offline to test it and to make sure everything is in working order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The settings are saved in &#039;&amp;lt;Joomla! root&amp;gt;/configuration.php&#039;. You have to either activate the FTP-layer or make the &#039;configuration.php&#039; file writable to save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Related Information==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[screen.cpanel.15|Control panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[screen.content.edit.15 | Article Manager - New/Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/howto/htaccess.html Info about .htaccess]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{cathelp|1.5|Global Configuration|Site}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Global.Config_Site.png&amp;diff=12582</id>
		<title>File:Global.Config Site.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=File:Global.Config_Site.png&amp;diff=12582"/>
		<updated>2009-01-11T15:04:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mic: Global Configuration Site Settings&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Global Configuration Site Settings&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing: ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{JEDL}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mic</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>